CY8C3666PVA-026 [CYPRESS]

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48;
CY8C3666PVA-026
型号: CY8C3666PVA-026
厂家: CYPRESS    CYPRESS
描述:

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48

时钟 光电二极管
文件: 总143页 (文件大小:3745K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
General Description  
With its unique array of configurable blocks, PSoC® 3 is a true system level solution providing microcontroller unit (MCU), memory,  
analog, and digital peripheral functions in a single chip while being AEC-Q100 compliant. The CY8C36 family offers a modern method  
of signal acquisition, signal processing, and control with high accuracy, high bandwidth, and high flexibility. Analog capability spans  
the range from thermocouples (near DC voltages) to ultrasonic signals. The CY8C36 family can handle dozens of data acquisition  
channels and analog inputs on every general-purpose input/output (GPIO) pin. The CY8C36 family is also a high-performance  
configurable digital system with some part numbers including interfaces such as USB, multimaster inter-integrated circuit (I2C), and  
controller area network (CAN). In addition to communication interfaces, the CY8C36 family has an easy to configure logic array, flexible  
routing to all I/O pins, and a high-performance single cycle 8051 microprocessor core. You can easily create system-level designs  
using a rich library of prebuilt components and boolean primitives using PSoC Creator™, a hierarchical schematic design entry tool.  
The CY8C36 family provides unparalleled opportunities for analog and digital bill of materials integration while easily accommodating  
last minute design changes through simple firmware updates.  
Library of standard peripherals  
Features  
• 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit timers, counters, and PWMs  
Single cycle 8051 CPU  
• Serial peripheral interface (SPI), universal asynchronous  
DC to 67 MHz operation  
Multiply and divide instructions  
Flash program memory, up to 64 KB, 100,000 write cycles,  
20 years retention, and multiple security features  
512-byte flash cache  
Up to 8-KB flash error correcting code (ECC) or configuration  
transmitter receiver (UART), and I2C  
• Many others available in catalog  
Library of advanced peripherals  
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)  
• Pseudo random sequence (PRS) generator  
• Local interconnect network (LIN) bus 2.0  
storage  
Up to 8 KB SRAM  
• Quadrature decoder  
Analog peripherals (1.71 V VDDA 5.5 V)  
1.024 V ± 0.1% internal voltage reference across –40 °C to  
+85 °C  
Configurable delta-sigma ADC with 8- to 12-bit resolution  
• Sample rates up to 192 ksps  
• Programmable gain stage: ×0.25 to ×16  
Up to 2 KB electrically erasable programmable read-only  
memory (EEPROM), 1 M cycles, and 20 years retention  
24-channel direct memory access (DMA) with multilayer  
AHB[1] bus access  
• Programmable chained descriptors and priorities  
• High bandwidth 32-bit transfer support  
• 12-bit mode, 192 ksps, 66-dB signal to noise and distortion  
ratio (SINAD), ±1-bit INL/DNL  
Low voltage, ultra low-power  
Wide operating voltage range: 1.71 V to 5.5 V  
0.8 mA at 3 MHz, 1.2 mA at 6 MHz, and 6.6 mA at 50 MHz  
Low-power modes including:  
Up to four 8-bit, 8-Msps IDACs or 1-Msps VDACs  
Four comparators with 95-ns response time  
Up to four uncommitted opamps with 25-mA drive capability  
Up to four configurable multifunction analog blocks. Example  
configurations are programmable gain amplifier (PGA),  
transimpedance amplifier (TIA), mixer, and sample and hold  
CapSense support  
Programming, debug, and trace  
JTAG (4-wire), serial wire debug (SWD) (2-wire), and single  
wire viewer (SWV) interfaces  
• 1-µA sleep mode with real time clock and low-voltage  
detect (LVD) interrupt  
• 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention  
Versatile I/O system  
29 to 72 I/O (62 GPIOs, eight special input/outputs (SIO),  
two USBIOs[2]  
)
Any GPIO to any digital or analog peripheral routability  
LCD direct drive from any GPIO, up to 46 × 16 segments[2]  
CapSense® support from any GPIO[3]  
1.2-V to 5.5-V I/O interface voltages, up to four domains  
Maskable, independent IRQ on any pin or port  
Schmitt-trigger transistor-transistor logic (TTL) inputs  
All GPIO configurable as open drain high/low, pull-up/  
pull-down, High Z, or strong output  
Configurable GPIO pin state at power-on reset (POR)  
25 mA sink on SIO  
Digital peripherals  
Eight address and one data breakpoint  
4-KB instruction trace buffer  
Bootloader programming supportable through I2C, SPI,  
UART, USB, and other interfaces  
Precision, programmable clocking  
3- to 62-MHz internal oscillator over full temperature and  
voltage range  
4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator for crystal PPM accuracy  
Internal PLL clock generation up to 67 MHz  
32.768-kHz watch crystal oscillator  
Low-power internal oscillator at 1, 33, and 100 kHz  
Temperature and packaging  
–40 °C to +85 °C degrees automotive temperature  
–40 °C to +125 °C Extended temperature range  
48-pin SSOP, and 100-pin TQFP package options  
AEC-Q100 compliant.  
20 to 24 programmable logic device (PLD) based universal  
digital blocks (UDB)  
Full CAN 2.0b 16 Rx, 8 Tx buffers[2]  
USB 2.0 certified Full-Speed (FS) 12 Mbps peripheral  
interface (TID#40770053) using internal oscillator[2]  
Up to four 16-bit configurable timer, counter, and PWM blocks  
67 MHz, 24-bit fixed point digital filter block (DFB) to  
implement FIR and IIR filters  
Notes  
1. AHB – AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus architecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data transfer bus  
2. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 133 for details.  
3. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Cypress Semiconductor Corporation  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
198 Champion Court  
San Jose, CA 95134-1709  
408-943-2600  
Revised February 14, 2014  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Contents  
1. Architectural Overview ..................................................3  
2. Pinouts ............................................................................5  
3. Pin Descriptions .............................................................9  
8.6 LCD Direct Drive ...................................................57  
8.7 CapSense ..............................................................58  
8.8 Temp Sensor .........................................................58  
8.9 DAC .......................................................................59  
8.10 Up/Down Mixer ....................................................59  
8.11 Sample and Hold .................................................59  
4. CPU ................................................................................10  
4.1 8051 CPU ..............................................................10  
4.2 Addressing Modes .................................................10  
4.3 Instruction Set .......................................................10  
4.4 DMA and PHUB ....................................................15  
4.5 Interrupt Controller ................................................17  
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources .............60  
9.1 JTAG Interface ......................................................60  
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface ..................................62  
9.3 Debug Features .....................................................63  
9.4 Trace Features ......................................................63  
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface .................................63  
9.6 Programming Features ..........................................63  
9.7 Device Security .....................................................63  
5. Memory ..........................................................................21  
5.1 Static RAM ............................................................21  
5.2 Flash Program Memory .........................................21  
5.3 Flash Security ........................................................21  
5.4 EEPROM ...............................................................21  
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs) ...................................22  
5.6 External Memory Interface ....................................23  
5.7 Memory Map .........................................................24  
10. Development Support ................................................64  
10.1 Documentation ....................................................64  
10.2 Online ..................................................................64  
10.3 Tools ....................................................................64  
6. System Integration .......................................................26  
6.1 Clocking System ....................................................26  
6.2 Power System .......................................................29  
6.3 Reset .....................................................................31  
6.4 I/O System and Routing ........................................33  
11. Electrical Specifications ............................................65  
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................65  
11.2 Device Level Specifications .................................66  
11.3 Power Regulators ................................................72  
11.4 Inputs and Outputs ..............................................74  
11.5 Analog Peripherals ..............................................86  
11.6 Digital Peripherals .............................................114  
11.7 Memory .............................................................120  
11.8 PSoC System Resources ..................................126  
11.9 Clocking .............................................................129  
7. Digital Subsystem ........................................................40  
7.1 Example Peripherals .............................................40  
7.2 Universal Digital Block ...........................................42  
7.3 UDB Array Description ..........................................45  
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description .........................45  
7.5 CAN .......................................................................47  
7.6 USB .......................................................................49  
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs ...............................49  
7.8 I2C .........................................................................50  
7.9 Digital Filter Block ..................................................51  
12. Ordering Information ................................................134  
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions ............................135  
13. Packaging ..................................................................136  
14. Acronyms ..................................................................138  
15. Reference Documents ..............................................139  
8. Analog Subsystem .......................................................51  
8.1 Analog Routing ......................................................52  
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC ...................................................54  
8.3 Comparators ..........................................................55  
8.4 Opamps .................................................................56  
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks ...............................56  
16. Document Conventions ...........................................140  
16.1 Units of Measure ...............................................140  
17. Revision History .......................................................141  
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information ................143  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 2 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
1. Architectural Overview  
Introducing the CY8C36 family of ultra low-power, flash Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®) devices, part of a scalable 8-bit  
PSoC 3 and 32-bit PSoC 5 platform. The CY8C36 family provides configurable blocks of analog, digital, and interconnect circuitry  
around a CPU subsystem. The combination of a CPU with a flexible analog subsystem, digital subsystem, routing, and I/O enables  
a high level of integration in a wide variety of automotive consumer, industrial, and medical applications.  
Figure 1-1. Simplified Block Diagram  
Analog Interconnect  
Digital Interconnect  
Digital System  
System Wide  
Resources  
I2  
C
Universal Digital Block Array (24x UDB)  
CAN  
2.0  
8-bit  
Timer  
Quadrature Decoder  
16-bit PRS  
Master/  
Slave  
16-bit  
PWM  
4to25MHz  
(Optional)  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
22  
Xtal  
Osc  
USB  
PHY  
UDB  
8-bit  
Timer  
FS USB  
2.0  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
I2C Slave  
UDB  
4x  
8-bit SPI  
Logic  
Timer  
Counter  
PWM  
12-bit SPI  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
IMO  
Logic  
32.768 KHz  
(Optional)  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UART  
12-bit PWM  
RTC  
Timer  
System Bus  
Program  
Debug  
&
Memory System  
CPU System  
WDT  
and  
Wake  
8051  
Interrupt  
Controller  
EEPROM  
SRAM  
Program  
Debug  
Trace  
&
PHUB  
DMA  
FLASH  
EMIF  
Boundary  
Scan  
ILO  
Clocking System  
Analog System  
ADC  
Digital  
Filter  
Block  
Power Management  
System  
LCD Direct  
Drive  
+
4 x  
Opamp  
POR and  
LVD  
3 per  
Opamp  
-
4 x SC/CT Blocks  
(TIA, PGA, Mixer etc)  
Sleep  
Power  
+
4 x  
CMP  
-
Del Sig  
ADC  
Temperature  
Sensor  
1.8V LDO  
4 x DAC  
CapSense  
Figure 1-1 illustrates the major components of the CY8C36  
family. They are:  
PSoC’s digital subsystem provides half of its unique  
configurability. It connects a digital signal from any peripheral to  
any pin through the digital system interconnect (DSI). It also  
provides functional flexibility through an array of small, fast,  
low-power UDBs. PSoC Creator provides a library of prebuilt and  
tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC,  
timer, counter, PWM, AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to  
the UDB array. You can also easily create a digital circuit using  
boolean primitives by means of graphical design entry. Each  
UDB contains programmable array logic (PAL)/programmable  
logic device (PLD) functionality, together with a small state  
machine engine to support a wide variety of peripherals.  
8051 CPU subsystem  
Nonvolatile subsystem  
Programming, debug, and test subsystem  
Inputs and outputs  
Clocking  
Power  
Digital subsystem  
Analog subsystem  
In addition to the flexibility of the UDB array, PSoC also provides  
configurable digital blocks targeted at specific functions. For the  
CY8C36 family these blocks can include four 16-bit timers,  
counters, and PWM blocks; I2C slave, master, and multimaster;  
FS USB; and Full CAN 2.0b.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 3 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
For more details on the peripherals see the “Example  
Peripherals” section on page 40 of this data sheet. For  
information on UDBs, DSI, and other digital blocks, see the  
“Digital Subsystem” section on page 40 of this data sheet.  
PSoC’s 8051 CPU subsystem is built around a single cycle  
pipelined 8051 8-bit processor running at up to 67 MHz. The  
CPU subsystem includes a programmable nested vector  
interrupt controller, DMA controller, and RAM. PSoC’s nested  
vector interrupt controller provides low latency by allowing the  
CPU to vector directly to the first address of the interrupt service  
routine, bypassing the jump instruction required by other  
architectures. The DMA controller enables peripherals to  
exchange data without CPU involvement. This allows the CPU  
to run slower (saving power) or use those CPU cycles to improve  
the performance of firmware algorithms. The single cycle 8051  
CPU runs ten times faster than a standard 8051 processor. The  
processor speed itself is configurable, allowing you to tune active  
power consumption for specific applications.  
PSoC’s analog subsystem is the second half of its unique  
configurability. All analog performance is based on a highly  
accurate absolute voltage reference with less than 0.1-percent  
error over temperature and voltage. The configurable analog  
subsystem includes:  
Analog muxes  
Comparators  
Voltage references  
Analog-to-digital converter (ADC)  
Digital-to-analog converters (DACs)  
Digital filter block (DFB)  
PSoC’s nonvolatile subsystem consists of flash, byte-writeable  
EEPROM, and nonvolatile configuration options. It provides up  
to 64 KB of on-chip flash. The CPU can reprogram individual  
blocks of flash, enabling bootloaders. You can enable an error  
correcting code (ECC) for high reliability applications. A powerful  
and flexible protection model secures the user's sensitive  
information, allowing selective memory block locking for read  
and write protection. Up to 2 KB of byte-writeable EEPROM is  
available on-chip to store application data. Additionally, selected  
configuration options such as boot speed and pin drive mode are  
stored in nonvolatile memory. This allows settings to activate  
immediately after POR.  
All GPIO pins can route analog signals into and out of the device  
using the internal analog bus. This allows the device to interface  
up to 62 discrete analog signals. The heart of the analog  
subsystem is a fast, accurate, configurable delta-sigma ADC  
with these features [4]  
:
Less than 100 µV offset  
A gain error of 0.2 percent  
INL less than ±2 LSB  
DNL less than ±1 LSB  
The three types of PSoC I/O are extremely flexible. All I/Os have  
many drive modes that are set at POR. PSoC also provides up  
to four I/O voltage domains through the VDDIO pins. Every GPIO  
has analog I/O, LCD drive[5], CapSense[6], flexible interrupt  
generation, slew rate control, and digital I/O capability. The SIOs  
on PSoC allow VOH to be set independently of Vddio when used  
as outputs. When SIOs are in input mode they are high  
impedance. This is true even when the device is not powered or  
when the pin voltage goes above the supply voltage. This makes  
the SIO ideally suited for use on an I2C bus where the PSoC may  
not be powered when other devices on the bus are. The SIO pins  
also have high current sink capability for applications such as  
LED drives. The programmable input threshold feature of the  
SIO can be used to make the SIO function as a general purpose  
analog comparator. For devices with Full-Speed USB the USB  
physical interface is also provided (USBIO). When not using  
USB these pins may also be used for limited digital functionality  
and device programming. All of the features of the PSoC I/Os are  
covered in detail in the “I/O System and Routing” section on  
page 33 of this data sheet.  
SINAD better than 84 dB in 16-bit mode  
This converter addresses a wide variety of precision analog  
applications, including some of the most demanding sensors.  
The output of the ADC can optionally feed the programmable  
DFB through the DMA without CPU intervention. You can  
configure the DFB to perform IIR and FIR digital filters and  
several user-defined custom functions. The DFB can implement  
filters with up to 64 taps. It can perform a 48-bit  
multiply-accumulate (MAC) operation in one clock cycle.  
Four high-speed voltage or current DACs support 8-bit output  
signals at an update rate of up to 8 Msps. They can be routed  
out of any GPIO pin. You can create higher resolution voltage  
PWM DAC outputs using the UDB array. This can be used to  
create a pulse width modulated (PWM) DAC of up to 10 bits, at  
up to 48 kHz. The digital DACs in each UDB support PWM, PRS,  
or delta-sigma algorithms with programmable widths. In addition  
to the ADC, DACs, and DFB, the analog subsystem provides  
multiple:  
Uncommitted opamps  
The PSoC device incorporates flexible internal clock generators,  
designed for high stability and factory trimmed for high accuracy.  
The internal main oscillator (IMO) is the clock base for the  
system, and has 1-percent accuracy at 3 MHz. The IMO can be  
configured to run from 3 MHz up to 62 MHz. Multiple clock  
derivatives can be generated from the main clock frequency to  
meet application needs. The device provides a PLL to generate  
clock frequencies up to 67 MHz from the IMO, external crystal,  
or external reference clock.  
Configurable switched capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT)  
blocks. These support:  
Transimpedance amplifiers  
Programmable gain amplifiers  
Mixers  
Other similar analog components  
See the “Analog Subsystem” section on page 51 of this data  
sheet for more details.  
Notes  
4. Refer Electrical Specifications on page 65 for the detailed ADC specification across entire voltage range and temperature.  
5. This feature on select devices only. See Ordering Information on page 133 for details.  
6. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 4 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
It also contains a separate, very low-power internal low-speed  
oscillator (ILO) for the sleep and watchdog timers. A 32.768-kHz  
external watch crystal is also supported for use in real-time  
clock (RTC) applications. The clocks, together with  
programmable clock dividers, provide the flexibility to integrate  
most timing requirements.  
2. Pinouts  
Each VDDIO pin powers a specific set of I/O pins. (The USBIOs  
are powered from VDDD.) Using the VDDIO pins, a single PSoC  
can support multiple voltage levels, reducing the need for  
off-chip level shifters. The black lines drawn on the pinout  
diagrams in Figure 2-3 through Figure 2-4 show the pins that are  
powered by each VDDIO.  
The CY8C36 family supports a wide supply operating range from  
1.71 V to 5.5 V. This allows operation from regulated supplies  
such as 1.8 V ± 5%, 2.5 V ±10%, 3.3 V ± 10%, or 5.0 V ± 10%,  
or directly from a wide range of battery types.  
Each VDDIO may source up to 100 mA [7] total to its associated  
I/O pins, as shown in Figure 2-1.  
PSoC supports a wide range of low-power modes. These include  
a 200-nA hibernate mode with RAM retention and a 1-µA sleep  
mode with RTC. In the second mode, the optional 32.768-kHz  
watch crystal runs continuously and maintains an accurate RTC.  
Figure 2-1. VDDIO Current Limit  
IDDIO X = 100 mA  
Power to all major functional blocks, including the programmable  
digital and analog peripherals, can be controlled independently  
by firmware. This allows low-power background processing  
when some peripherals are not in use. This, in turn, provides a  
total device current of only 1.2 mA when the CPU is running at  
6 MHz, or 0.8 mA running at 3 MHz.  
VDDIO X  
I/O Pins  
PSoC  
The details of the PSoC power modes are covered in the “Power  
System” section on page 29 of this data sheet.  
PSoC uses JTAG (4-wire) or SWD (2-wire) interfaces for  
programming, debug, and test. The 1-wire SWV may also be  
used for ‘printf’ style debugging. By combining SWD and SWV,  
you can implement a full debugging interface with just three pins.  
Using these standard interfaces you can debug or program the  
PSoC with a variety of hardware solutions from Cypress or third  
party vendors. PSoC supports on-chip break points and 4-KB  
instruction and data race memory for debug. Details of the  
programming, test, and debugging interfaces are discussed in  
the “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” section on  
page 60 of this data sheet.  
Conversely, for the 100-pin and 68-pin devices, the set of I/O  
pins associated with any VDDIO may sink up to 100 mA [7] total,  
as shown in Figure 2-2.  
Figure 2-2. I/O Pins Current Limit  
Ipins = 100 mA  
VDDIO X  
I/O Pins  
PSoC  
VSSD  
For the 48-pin devices, the set of I/O pins associated with  
VDDIO0 plus VDDIO2 may sink up to 100 mA [7] total. The set  
of I/O pins associated with VDDIO1 plus VDDIO3 may sink up to  
a total of 100 mA.  
Note  
7. The 100 mA source/ sink current per Vddio is valid only for temperature range of –40 °C to +85 °C. For extended temperature range of –40 °C to +125 °C, the maximum  
source or sink current per Vddio is 40 mA.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 5 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 2-3. 48-pin SSOP Part Pinout  
(SIO) P12[2]  
(SIO) P12[3]  
VDDA  
VSSA  
VCCA  
1
2
48  
47  
46  
Lines show  
VDDIO to I/O  
supply  
(Opamp2OUT, GPIO) P0[0]  
(Opamp0OUT, GPIO) P0[1]  
(Opamp0+, GPIO) P0[2]  
(Opamp0-/Extref0, GPIO) P0[3]  
VDDIO0  
3
4
45 P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)  
44 P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)  
43 P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
42 P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)  
41 VDDIO3  
5
association  
6
7
(Opamp2+, GPIO) P0[4]  
(Opamp2-, GPIO) P0[5]  
(IDAC0, GPIO) P0[6]  
(IDAC2, GPIO) P0[7]  
VCCD  
8
9
40 P15[1] (GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XI)  
P15[0] (GPIO, MHZ XTAL: XO)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
39  
38  
37  
36  
VCCD  
VSSD  
VDDD  
SSOP  
VSSD  
[8]  
VDDD 14  
(GPIO) P2[3]  
35 P15[7] (USBIO, D-, SWDCK)  
[8]  
P15[6] (USBIO, D+, SWDIO)  
P1[7] (GPIO)  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
(GPIO) P2[4]  
VDDIO2  
P1[6] (GPIO)  
(GPIO) P2[5]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
VSSD  
VDDIO1  
P1[5] (GPIO, nTRST)  
P1[4] (GPIO, TDI)  
P1[3] (GPIO, TDO, SWV)  
NC  
P1[2] (GPIO, Configurable XRES)  
P1[1] (GPIO, TCK, SWDCK)  
VSSD  
VSSD 24  
25 P1[0] (GPIO, TMS, SWDIO)  
Note  
8. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 6 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 2-4. 100-pin TQFP Part Pinout  
(GPIO) P2[5]  
(GPIO) P2[6]  
(GPIO) P2[7]  
VDDIO0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
75  
74  
P0[3] (GPIO, Opamp0-/Extref0)  
P0[2] (GPIO, Opamp0+)  
P0[1] (GPIO, Opamp0OUT)  
73  
72  
71  
Lines show VDDIO  
to I/O supply  
association  
(I2C0: SCL, SIO) P12[4]  
(I2C0: SDA, SIO) P12[5]  
(GPIO) P6[4]  
P0[0] (GPIO, Opamp2OUT)  
P4[1] (GPIO)  
P4[0] (GPIO)  
P12[3] (SIO)  
P12[2] (SIO)  
VSSD  
70  
69  
(GPIO) P6[5]  
(GPIO) P6[6]  
(GPIO) P6[7]  
7
8
9
68  
67  
66  
10  
VSSD  
NC  
VSSD  
VSSD  
VDDA  
VSSA  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
65  
64  
63  
VCCA  
NC  
TQFP  
VSSD  
XRES  
(GPIO) P5[0]  
(GPIO) P5[1]  
62  
61  
60  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
(GPIO) P5[2]  
(GPIO) P5[3]  
(TMS, SWDIO, GPIO) P1[0]  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
NC  
P15[3] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XI)  
P15[2] (GPIO, KHZ XTAL: XO)  
(TCK, SWDCK, GPIO) P1[1]  
(Configurable XRES, GPIO) P1[2]  
(TDO, SWV, GPIO) P1[3]  
P12[1] (SIO, I2C1: SDA)  
P12[0] (SIO, I2C1: SCL)  
P3[7] (GPIO, Opamp3OUT)  
54  
53  
52  
51  
23  
(TDI, GPIO) P1[4]  
(nTRST, GPIO) P1[5]  
24  
25  
P3[6] (GPIO, Opamp1OUT)  
Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6 show an example schematic and an example PCB layout, for the 100-pin TQFP part, for optimal analog  
performance on a two-layer board.  
The two pins labeled VDDD must be connected together.  
The two pins labeled VCCD must be connected together, with capacitance added, as shown in Figure 2-5 and Power System on  
page 29. The trace between the two VCCD pins should be as short as possible.  
The two pins labeled Vssd must be connected together.  
For information on circuit board layout issues for mixed signals, refer to the application note, AN57821 - Mixed Signal Circuit Board  
Layout Considerations for PSoC® 3 and PSoC 5.  
Note  
9. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB. The pin must be left floating.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 7 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 2-5. Example Schematic for 100-pin TQFP Part with Power Connections  
VDDD  
VDDD  
C1  
1uF  
C2  
0.1uF  
VDDD  
VCCD  
C6  
0.1uF  
VSSD  
VSSD  
VSSD  
VDDD  
VDDA  
75  
74  
73  
72  
71  
70  
69  
68  
67  
66  
65  
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
P2[5]  
P2[6]  
P2[7]  
P12[4], SIO  
P12[5], SIO  
P6[4]  
P6[5]  
P6[6]  
P6[7]  
VSSB  
IND  
VBOOST  
VBAT  
VSSD  
XRES  
P5[0]  
P5[1]  
VDDIO0  
OA0-, REF0, P0[3]  
OA0+, P0[2]  
OA0OUT, P0[1]  
OA2OUT, P0[0]  
P4[1]  
C8  
0.1uF  
C17  
1uF  
VSSD  
P4[0]  
VSSA  
SIO, P12[3]  
SIO, P12[2]  
VSSD  
VSSD  
VDDA  
VSSA  
VCCA  
VDDA  
VDDA  
VSSA  
VCCA  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
VSSD  
VSSD  
C9  
1uF  
C10  
0.1uF  
P5[2]  
P5[3]  
NC  
VSSA  
P1[0], SWIO, TMS  
P1[1], SWDIO, TCK  
P1[2]  
P1[3], SWV, TDO  
P1[4], TDI  
P1[5], NTRST  
KHZXIN, P15[3]  
KHZXOUT, P15[2]  
SIO, P12[1]  
SIO, P12[0]  
OA3OUT, P3[7]  
OA1OUT, P3[6]  
VDDD  
VDDD  
C11  
0.1uF  
C12  
0.1uF  
VSSD  
C15  
1uF  
VSSD  
C16  
0.1uF  
VSSD  
Note The two Vccd pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended, as  
shown in Figure 2-6 on page 9.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 8 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 2-6. Example PCB Layout for 100-pin TQFP Part for Optimal Analog Performance  
VSSA  
VSSD  
VDDD  
VDDA  
VSSA  
Plane  
VSSD  
Plane  
MHz XTAL: Xo, MHz XTAL: Xi  
4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator pin.  
nTRST  
3. Pin Descriptions  
IDAC0, IDAC1, IDAC2, IDAC3  
Low resistance output pin for high current DACs (IDAC).  
Optional JTAG test reset programming and debug port  
connection to reset the JTAG connection.  
Opamp0OUT, Opamp1OUT, Opamp2OUT, Opamp3OUT  
High current output of uncommitted opamp[10]  
.
SIO  
Extref0, Extref1  
Special I/O provides interfaces to the CPU, digital peripherals  
and interrupts with a programmable high threshold voltage,  
analog comparator, high sink current, and high impedance state  
when the device is unpowered.  
External reference input to the analog system.  
Opamp0–, Opamp1–, Opamp2–, Opamp3–  
Inverting input to uncommitted opamp.  
Opamp0+, Opamp1+, Opamp2+, Opamp3+  
Noninverting input to uncommitted opamp.  
GPIO  
SWDCK  
Serial wire debug clock programming and debug port  
connection.  
SWDIO  
Serial wire debug input and output programming and debug port  
connection.  
General purpose I/O pin provides interfaces to the CPU, digital  
peripherals, analog peripherals, interrupts, LCD segment drive,  
and CapSense[10]  
.
SWV  
I2C0: SCL, I2C1: SCL  
Single wire viewer debug output.  
I2C SCL line providing wake from sleep on an address match.  
Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SCL if wake from sleep is not  
required.  
TCK  
JTAG test clock programming and debug port connection.  
TDI  
I2C0: SDA, I2C1: SDA  
I2C SDA line providing wake from sleep on an address match.  
Any I/O pin can be used for I2C SDA if wake from sleep is not  
required.  
JTAG test data in programming and debug port connection.  
TDO  
JTAG test data out programming and debug port connection.  
TMS  
kHz XTAL: Xo, kHz XTAL: Xi  
32.768-kHz crystal oscillator pin.  
JTAG test mode select programming and debug port connection.  
Note  
10. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 9 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
USBIO, D+  
4. CPU  
Provides D+ connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus. May be used  
as a digital I/O pin; it is powered from VDDD instead of from a  
VDDIO. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB.  
4.1 8051 CPU  
The CY8C36 devices use a single cycle 8051 CPU, which is fully  
compatible with the original MCS-51 instruction set. The  
CY8C36 family uses a pipelined RISC architecture, which  
executes most instructions in 1 to 2 cycles to provide peak  
performance of up to 33 MIPS with an average of 2 cycles per  
instruction. The single cycle 8051 CPU runs ten times faster than  
a standard 8051 processor.  
USBIO, D–  
Provides D– connection directly to a USB 2.0 bus. May be used  
as a digital I/O pin; it is powered from VDDD instead of from a  
VDDIO. Pins are Do Not Use (DNU) on devices without USB.  
VCCA.  
The 8051 CPU subsystem includes these features:  
Output of the analog core regulator or the input to the  
analog core. Requires a 1uF capacitor to VSSA. The regulator  
output is not designed to drive external circuits. Note that if you  
use the device with an external core regulator (externally  
regulated mode), the voltage applied to this pin must not  
exceed the allowable range of 1.71 V to 1.89 V. When using  
the internal core regulator, (internally regulated mode, the  
default), do not tie any power to this pin. For details see Power  
System on page 29.  
Single cycle 8051 CPU  
Up to 64 KB of flash memory, up to 2 KB of EEPROM, and up  
to 8 KB of SRAM  
512-byte instruction cache between CPU and flash  
Programmable nested vector interrupt controller  
DMA controller  
Peripheral HUB (PHUB)  
VCCD.  
External memory interface (EMIF)  
Output of the digital core regulator or the input to the digital  
core. The two VCCD pins must be shorted together, with the  
trace between them as short as possible, and a 1uF capacitor to  
VSSD. The regulator output is not designed to drive external  
circuits. Note that if you use the device with an external core  
regulator (externally regulated mode), the voltage applied to  
this pin must not exceed the allowable range of 1.71 V to  
1.89 V. When using the internal core regulator (internally  
regulated mode, the default), do not tie any power to this pin. For  
details see Power System on page 29.  
4.2 Addressing Modes  
The following addressing modes are supported by the 8051:  
Direct Addressing: The operand is specified by a direct 8-bit  
address field. Only the internal RAM and the SFRs can be  
accessed using this mode.  
IndirectAddressing:Theinstructionspecifiestheregisterwhich  
contains the address of the operand. The registers R0 or R1  
are used to specify the 8-bit address, while the data pointer  
(DPTR) register is used to specify the 16-bit address.  
VDDA  
Supply for all analog peripherals and analog core regulator.  
VDDA must be the highest voltage present on the device. All  
other supply pins must be less than or equal to VDDA.  
Register Addressing: Certain instructions access one of the  
registers (R0 to R7) in the specified register bank. These  
instructions are more efficient because there is no need for an  
address field.  
VDDD  
Supply for all digital peripherals and digital core regulator. VDDD  
must be less than or equal to VDDA.  
Register Specific Instructions: Some instructions are specific  
to certain registers. For example, some instructions always act  
on the accumulator. In this case, there is no need to specify the  
operand.  
VSSA  
Ground for all analog peripherals.  
VSSD  
Immediate Constants: Some instructions carry the value of the  
constants directly instead of an address.  
Ground for all digital logic and I/O pins.  
VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3  
Indexed Addressing: This type of addressing can be used only  
for a read of the program memory. This mode uses the Data  
Pointer as the base and the accumulator value as an offset to  
read a program memory.  
Supply for I/O pins. Each VDDIO must be tied to a valid operating  
voltage (1.71 V to 5.5 V), and must be less than or equal to  
VDDA.  
Bit Addressing: In this mode, the operand is one of 256 bits.  
XRES (and configurable XRES)  
4.3 Instruction Set  
External reset pin. Active low with internal pull-up. Pin P1[2] may  
be configured to be a XRES pin; see “Nonvolatile Latches  
(NVLs)” on page 22.  
The 8051 instruction set is highly optimized for 8-bit handling and  
Boolean operations. The types of instructions supported include:  
Arithmetic instructions  
Logical instructions  
Data transfer instructions  
Boolean instructions  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 10 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Program branching instructions  
4.3.1 Instruction Set Summary  
4.3.1.1 Arithmetic Instructions  
Arithmetic instructions support the direct, indirect, register, immediate constant, and register-specific instructions. Arithmetic modes  
are used for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, increment, and decrement operations. Table 4-1 lists the different arithmetic  
instructions.  
Table 4-1. Arithmetic Instructions  
Mnemonic  
ADD A,Rn  
Description  
Add register to accumulator  
Bytes  
Cycles  
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
3
1
2
6
3
ADD A,Direct  
ADD A,@Ri  
ADD A,#data  
ADDC A,Rn  
Add direct byte to accumulator  
Add indirect RAM to accumulator  
Add immediate data to accumulator  
Add register to accumulator with carry  
Add direct byte to accumulator with carry  
Add indirect RAM to accumulator with carry  
Add immediate data to accumulator with carry  
Subtract register from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract direct byte from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract indirect RAM from accumulator with borrow  
Subtract immediate data from accumulator with borrow  
Increment accumulator  
ADDC A,Direct  
ADDC A,@Ri  
ADDC A,#data  
SUBB A,Rn  
SUBB A,Direct  
SUBB A,@Ri  
SUBB A,#data  
INC  
A
INC Rn  
Increment register  
INC Direct  
INC @Ri  
Increment direct byte  
Increment indirect RAM  
DEC  
A
Decrement accumulator  
DEC Rn  
DEC Direct  
DEC @Ri  
INC DPTR  
MUL  
Decrement register  
Decrement direct byte  
Decrement indirect RAM  
Increment data pointer  
Multiply accumulator and B  
DIV  
Divide accumulator by B  
DAA  
Decimal adjust accumulator  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 11 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
4.3.1.2 Logical Instructions  
The logical instructions perform Boolean operations such as AND, OR, XOR on bytes, rotate of accumulator contents, and swap of  
nibbles in an accumulator. The Boolean operations on the bytes are performed on the bit-by-bit basis. Table 4-2 shows the list of  
logical instructions and their description.  
Table 4-2. Logical Instructions  
Mnemonic  
ANL A,Rn  
Description  
AND register to accumulator  
Bytes  
Cycles  
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ANL A,Direct  
ANL A,@Ri  
AND direct byte to accumulator  
AND indirect RAM to accumulator  
AND immediate data to accumulator  
AND accumulator to direct byte  
AND immediate data to direct byte  
OR register to accumulator  
ANL A,#data  
ANL Direct, A  
ANL Direct, #data  
ORL A,Rn  
ORL A,Direct  
ORL A,@Ri  
OR direct byte to accumulator  
OR indirect RAM to accumulator  
OR immediate data to accumulator  
OR accumulator to direct byte  
OR immediate data to direct byte  
XOR register to accumulator  
XOR direct byte to accumulator  
XOR indirect RAM to accumulator  
XOR immediate data to accumulator  
XOR accumulator to direct byte  
XOR immediate data to direct byte  
Clear accumulator  
ORL A,#data  
ORL Direct, A  
ORL Direct, #data  
XRL A,Rn  
XRL A,Direct  
XRL A,@Ri  
XRL A,#data  
XRL Direct, A  
XRL Direct, #data  
CLR  
CPL  
RL  
A
A
A
A
A
Complement accumulator  
Rotate accumulator left  
RLC  
RR  
Rotate accumulator left through carry  
Rotate accumulator right  
RRC A  
SWAP A  
Rotate accumulator right though carry  
Swap nibbles within accumulator  
4.3.1.3 Data Transfer Instructions  
addressing mode. Table 4-3 lists the various data transfer  
instructions available.  
The data transfer instructions are of three types: the core RAM,  
xdata RAM, and the lookup tables. The core RAM transfer  
includes transfer between any two core RAM locations or SFRs.  
These instructions can use direct, indirect, register, and  
immediate addressing. The xdata RAM transfer includes only the  
transfer between the accumulator and the xdata RAM location.  
It can use only indirect addressing. The lookup tables involve  
nothing but the read of program memory using the Indexed  
4.3.1.4 Boolean Instructions  
The 8051 core has a separate bit-addressable memory location.  
It has 128 bits of bit addressable RAM and a set of SFRs that are  
bit addressable. The instruction set includes the whole menu of  
bit operations such as move, set, clear, toggle, OR, and AND  
instructions and the conditional jump instructions. Table 4-4 lists  
the available Boolean instructions.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 12 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 4-3. Data Transfer Instructions  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
1
Cycles  
MOV A,Rn  
Move register to accumulator  
Move direct byte to accumulator  
1
2
2
2
1
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
5
4
4
3
5
4
3
2
2
3
3
3
MOV A,Direct  
MOV A,@Ri  
2
Move indirect RAM to accumulator  
Move immediate data to accumulator  
Move accumulator to register  
1
MOV A,#data  
2
MOV Rn,A  
1
MOV Rn,Direct  
MOV Rn, #data  
MOV Direct, A  
MOV Direct, Rn  
MOV Direct, Direct  
MOV Direct, @Ri  
MOV Direct, #data  
MOV @Ri, A  
Move direct byte to register  
2
Move immediate data to register  
2
Move accumulator to direct byte  
2
Move register to direct byte  
2
Move direct byte to direct byte  
3
Move indirect RAM to direct byte  
2
Move immediate data to direct byte  
Move accumulator to indirect RAM  
Move direct byte to indirect RAM  
3
1
MOV @Ri, Direct  
MOV @Ri, #data  
MOV DPTR, #data16  
MOVC A, @A+DPTR  
MOVC A, @A + PC  
MOVX A,@Ri  
2
Move immediate data to indirect RAM  
Load data pointer with 16 bit constant  
Move code byte relative to DPTR to accumulator  
Move code byte relative to PC to accumulator  
Move external RAM (8-bit) to accumulator  
Move external RAM (16-bit) to accumulator  
Move accumulator to external RAM (8-bit)  
Move accumulator to external RAM (16-bit)  
Push direct byte onto stack  
2
3
1
1
1
MOVX A, @DPTR  
MOVX @Ri, A  
1
1
MOVX @DPTR, A  
PUSH Direct  
1
2
POP Direct  
Pop direct byte from stack  
2
XCH A, Rn  
Exchange register with accumulator  
Exchange direct byte with accumulator  
Exchange indirect RAM with accumulator  
Exchange low order indirect digit RAM with accumulator  
1
XCH A, Direct  
XCH A, @Ri  
2
1
XCHD A, @Ri  
1
Table 4-4. Boolean Instructions  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
CLR  
C
Clear carry  
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
3
1
3
2
CLR bit  
SETB C  
SETB bit  
Clear direct bit  
Set carry  
Set direct bit  
CPL  
C
Complement carry  
Complement direct bit  
AND direct bit to carry  
CPL bit  
ANL C, bit  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 13 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 4-4. Boolean Instructions (continued)  
Mnemonic  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
ANL C, /bit  
ORL C, bit  
ORL C, /bit  
MOV C, bit  
MOV bit, C  
AND complement of direct bit to carry  
OR direct bit to carry  
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
OR complement of direct bit to carry  
Move direct bit to carry  
Move carry to direct bit  
JC  
rel  
Jump if carry is set  
JNC rel  
Jump if no carry is set  
JB  
bit, rel  
Jump if direct bit is set  
JNB bit, rel  
JBC bit, rel  
Jump if direct bit is not set  
Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 14 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
4.3.1.5 Program Branching Instructions  
The 8051 supports a set of conditional and unconditional jump instructions that help to modify the program execution flow. Table 4-5  
shows the list of jump instructions.  
Table 4-5. Jump Instructions  
Mnemonic  
ACALL addr11  
Description  
Bytes  
Cycles  
Absolute subroutine call  
Long subroutine call  
Return from subroutine  
Return from interrupt  
Absolute jump  
2
3
1
1
2
3
2
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
1
4
4
4
4
3
4
3
5
4
4
5
4
4
5
4
5
1
LCALL addr16  
RET  
RETI  
AJMP addr11  
LJMP addr16  
SJMP rel  
Long jump  
Short jump (relative address)  
JMP @A + DPTR  
JZ rel  
Jump indirect relative to DPTR  
Jump if accumulator is zero  
JNZ rel  
Jump if accumulator is nonzero  
CJNE A,Direct, rel  
CJNE A, #data, rel  
CJNE Rn, #data, rel  
CJNE @Ri, #data, rel  
DJNZ Rn,rel  
DJNZ Direct, rel  
NOP  
Compare direct byte to accumulator and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to accumulator and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to register and jump if not equal  
Compare immediate data to indirect RAM and jump if not equal  
Decrement register and jump if not zero  
Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero  
No operation  
4.4.1 PHUB Features  
4.4 DMA and PHUB  
The PHUB and the DMA controller are responsible for data  
transfer between the CPU and peripherals, and also data  
transfers between peripherals. The PHUB and DMA also control  
device configuration during boot. The PHUB consists of:  
CPU and DMA controller are both bus masters to the PHUB  
Eight multi-layer AHB bus parallel access paths (spokes) for  
peripheral access  
Simultaneous CPU and DMA access to peripherals located on  
different spokes  
A central hub that includes the DMA controller, arbiter, and  
router  
Simultaneous DMA source and destination burst transactions  
on different spokes  
Multiple spokes that radiate outward from the hub to most  
peripherals  
Supports 8-, 16-, 24-, and 32-bit addressing and data  
There are two PHUB masters: the CPU and the DMA controller.  
Both masters may initiate transactions on the bus. The DMA  
channels can handle peripheral communication without CPU  
intervention. The arbiter in the central hub determines which  
DMA channel is the highest priority if there are multiple requests.  
Table 4-6. PHUB Spokes and Peripherals  
PHUB Spokes  
Peripherals  
0
1
2
SRAM  
IOs, PICU, EMIF  
PHUB local configuration, Power manager,  
Clocks, IC, SWV, EEPROM, Flash  
programming interface  
3
4
5
6
7
Analog interface and trim, Decimator  
USB, CAN, I2C, Timers, Counters, and PWMs  
DFB  
UDBs group 1  
UDBs group 2  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 15 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
4.4.2 DMA Features  
Priority levels 2 to 7 are guaranteed the minimum bus bandwidth  
shown in Table 4-7 after the CPU and DMA priority levels 0 and  
1 have satisfied their requirements.  
24 DMA channels  
Each channel has one or more transaction descriptors (TD) to  
Table 4-7. Priority Levels  
configure channel behavior. Up to 128 total TDs can be defined  
Priority Level  
% Bus Bandwidth  
TDs can be dynamically updated  
Eight levels of priority per channel  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
100.0  
100.0  
50.0  
25.0  
12.5  
6.2  
Anydigitallyroutablesignal, theCPU, oranotherDMAchannel,  
can trigger a transaction  
Each channel can generate up to two interrupts per transfer  
Transactions can be stalled or canceled  
3.1  
Supports transaction size of infinite or 1 to 64 KB  
TDs may be nested and/or chained for complex transactions  
1.5  
4.4.3 Priority Levels  
When the fairness algorithm is disabled, DMA access is granted  
based solely on the priority level; no bus bandwidth guarantees  
are made.  
The CPU always has higher priority than the DMA controller  
when their accesses require the same bus resources. Due to the  
system architecture, the CPU can never starve the DMA. DMA  
channels of higher priority (lower priority number) may interrupt  
current DMA transfers. In the case of an interrupt, the current  
transfer is allowed to complete its current transaction. To ensure  
latency limits when multiple DMA accesses are requested  
simultaneously, a fairness algorithm guarantees an interleaved  
minimum percentage of bus bandwidth for priority levels 2  
through 7. Priority levels 0 and 1 do not take part in the fairness  
algorithm and may use 100 percent of the bus bandwidth. If a tie  
occurs on two DMA requests of the same priority level, a simple  
round robin method is used to evenly share the allocated  
bandwidth. The round robin allocation can be disabled for each  
DMA channel, allowing it to always be at the head of the line.  
4.4.4 Transaction Modes Supported  
The flexible configuration of each DMA channel and the ability to  
chain multiple channels allow the creation of both simple and  
complex use cases. General use cases include, but are not  
limited to:  
4.4.4.1 Simple DMA  
In a simple DMA case, a single TD transfers data between a  
source and sink (peripherals or memory location). The basic  
timing diagrams of DMA read and write cycles are shown in  
Figure 4-1. For more description on other transfer modes, refer  
to the Technical Reference Manual.  
Figure 4-1. DMA Timing Diagram  
ADDRESS Phase  
DATA Phase  
ADDRESS Phase  
DATA Phase  
CLK  
CLK  
ADDR 16/32  
WRITE  
ADDR 16/32  
A
B
A
B
WRITE  
DATA  
DATA (A)  
DATA (A)  
DATA  
READY  
READY  
Basic DMA Read Transfer without wait states  
Basic DMA Write Transfer without wait states  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 16 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
4.4.4.2 Auto Repeat DMA  
phase TD(s) finish, a status phase TD can be invoked that reads  
some memory mapped status information from the peripheral  
and copies it to a location in system memory specified by the  
CPU for later inspection. Multiple sets of configuration, data, and  
status phase ‘subchains’ can be strung together to create larger  
chains that transmit multiple packets in this way. A similar  
concept exists in the opposite direction to receive the packets.  
Auto repeat DMA is typically used when a static pattern is  
repetitively read from system memory and written to a peripheral.  
This is done with a single TD that chains to itself.  
4.4.4.3 Ping Pong DMA  
A ping pong DMA case uses double buffering to allow one buffer  
to be filled by one client while another client is consuming the  
data previously received in the other buffer. In its simplest form,  
this is done by chaining two TDs together so that each TD calls  
the opposite TD when complete.  
4.4.4.7 Nested DMA  
One TD may modify another TD, as the TD configuration space  
is memory mapped similar to any other peripheral. For example,  
a first TD loads a second TD’s configuration and then calls the  
second TD. The second TD moves data as required by the  
application. When complete, the second TD calls the first TD,  
which again updates the second TD’s configuration. This  
process repeats as often as necessary.  
4.4.4.4 Circular DMA  
Circular DMA is similar to ping pong DMA except it contains more  
than two buffers. In this case there are multiple TDs; after the last  
TD is complete it chains back to the first TD.  
4.5 Interrupt Controller  
4.4.4.5 Scatter Gather DMA  
The interrupt controller provides a mechanism for hardware  
resources to change program execution to a new address,  
independent of the current task being executed by the main  
code. The interrupt controller provides enhanced features not  
found on original 8051 interrupt controllers:  
In the case of scatter gather DMA, there are multiple  
noncontiguous sources or destinations that are required to  
effectively carry out an overall DMA transaction. For example, a  
packet may need to be transmitted off of the device and the  
packet elements, including the header, payload, and trailer, exist  
in various noncontiguous locations in memory. Scatter gather  
DMA allows the segments to be concatenated together by using  
multiple TDs in a chain. The chain gathers the data from the  
multiple locations. A similar concept applies for the reception of  
data onto the device. Certain parts of the received data may need  
to be scattered to various locations in memory for software  
processing convenience. Each TD in the chain specifies the  
location for each discrete element in the chain.  
Thirty-two interrupt vectors  
Jumps directly to ISR anywhere in code space with dynamic  
vector addresses  
Multiple sources for each vector  
Flexible interrupt to vector matching  
Each interrupt vector is independently enabled or disabled  
4.4.4.6 Packet Queuing DMA  
Each interrupt can be dynamically assigned one of eight  
priorities  
Packet queuing DMA is similar to scatter gather DMA but  
specifically refers to packet protocols. With these protocols,  
there may be separate configuration, data, and status phases  
associated with sending or receiving a packet.  
Eight level nestable interrupts  
Multiple I/O interrupt vectors  
Software can send interrupts  
Software can clear pending interrupts  
For instance, to transmit a packet, a memory mapped  
configuration register can be written inside a peripheral,  
specifying the overall length of the ensuing data phase. The CPU  
can set up this configuration information anywhere in system  
memory and copy it with a simple TD to the peripheral. After the  
configuration phase, a data phase TD (or a series of data phase  
TDs) can begin (potentially using scatter gather). When the data  
Figure 4-2 on page 18 represents typical flow of events when an  
interrupt triggered. Figure 4-3 on page 19 shows the interrupt  
structure and priority polling.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 17 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 4-2. Interrupt Processing Timing Diagram  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
S
Arrival of new Interrupt  
S
Pend bit is set on next clock active edge  
Interrupt is posted to ascertain the priority  
POST and PEND bits cleared after IRQ is sleared  
S
S
IRQ cleared after receiving IRA  
Interrupt request sent to core for processing  
S
S
The active interrupt  
NA  
NA  
0x0010  
number is posted to core  
S
S
The active interrupt ISR  
address is posted to core  
NA  
S
S
S
Int. State  
Clear  
Interrupt generation and posting to CPU  
CPU Response  
Completing current instruction and branching to vector address  
Complete ISR and return  
Notes  
1: Interrupt triggered asynchronous to the clock  
2: The PEND bit is set on next active clock edge to indicate the interrupt arrival  
3: POST bit is set following the PEND bit  
4: Interrupt request and the interrupt number sent to CPU core after evaluation priority (Takes 3 clocks)  
5: ISR address is posted to CPU core for branching  
6: CPU acknowledges the interrupt request  
7: ISR address is read by CPU for branching  
8, 9: PEND and POST bits are cleared respectively after receiving the IRA from core  
10: IRA bit is cleared after completing the current instruction and starting the instruction execution from ISR location (Takes 7 cycles)  
11: IRC is set to indicate the completion of ISR, Active int. status is restored with previous status  
The total interrupt latency (ISR execution)  
= POST + PEND + IRQ + IRA + Completing current instruction and branching  
= 1+1+1+2+7 cycles  
= 12 cycles  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 18 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 4-3. Interrupt Structure  
Interrupt Polling logic  
Interrupts form Fixed  
function blocks, DMA and  
UDBs  
Highest Priority  
Interrupt Enable/  
Disable, PEND and  
POST logic  
Interrupts 0 to 31  
from UDBs  
0
Interrupts 0 to 31  
from Fixed  
1
Function Blocks  
IRQ  
0 to 31  
[15:0]  
ACTIVE_INT_NUM  
INT_VECT_ADDR  
Individual  
Enable Disable  
bits  
8 Level  
Priority  
decoder  
for all  
Interrupt  
routing logic  
to select 32  
sources  
Interrupts 0 to  
31 from DMA  
interrupts  
IRA  
IRC  
31  
Global Enable  
disable bit  
Lowest Priority  
When an interrupt is pending, the current instruction is completed and the program  
counter is pushed onto the stack. Code execution then jumps to the program address  
provided by the vector. After the ISR is completed, a RETI instruction is executed  
and returns execution to the instruction following the previously interrupted  
instruction. To do this the RETI instruction pops the program counter from the stack.  
direct connections to the most common interrupt sources and provide the lowest  
resource cost connection. The DMA interrupt sources provide direct connections to  
the two DMA interrupt sources provided per DMA channel. The third interrupt source  
for vectors is from the UDB digital routing array. This allows any digital signal  
available to the UDB array to be used as an interrupt source. Fixed function interrupts  
and all interrupt sources may be routed to any interrupt vector using the UDB  
interrupt source connections.  
If the same priority level is assigned to two or more interrupts, the interrupt with the  
lower vector number is executed first. Each interrupt vector may choose from three  
interrupt sources: Fixed Function, DMA, and UDB. The fixed function interrupts are  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 19 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 4-8. Interrupt Vector Table  
Fixed Function  
#
DMA  
UDB  
udb_intr[0]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LVD  
phub_termout0[0]  
phub_termout0[1]  
phub_termout0[2]  
phub_termout0[3]  
phub_termout0[4]  
phub_termout0[5]  
phub_termout0[6]  
phub_termout0[7]  
phub_termout0[8]  
phub_termout0[9]  
phub_termout0[10]  
phub_termout0[11]  
phub_termout0[12]  
phub_termout0[13]  
phub_termout0[14]  
phub_termout0[15]  
phub_termout1[0]  
phub_termout1[1]  
phub_termout1[2]  
phub_termout1[3]  
phub_termout1[4]  
phub_termout1[5]  
phub_termout1[6]  
phub_termout1[7]  
phub_termout1[8]  
phub_termout1[9]  
phub_termout1[10]  
phub_termout1[11]  
phub_termout1[12]  
phub_termout1[13]  
phub_termout1[14]  
phub_termout1[15]  
Cache/ECC  
Reserved  
udb_intr[1]  
udb_intr[2]  
udb_intr[3]  
udb_intr[4]  
udb_intr[5]  
udb_intr[6]  
udb_intr[7]  
udb_intr[8]  
udb_intr[9]  
udb_intr[10]  
udb_intr[11]  
udb_intr[12]  
udb_intr[13]  
udb_intr[14]  
udb_intr[15]  
udb_intr[16]  
udb_intr[17]  
udb_intr[18]  
udb_intr[19]  
udb_intr[20]  
udb_intr[21]  
udb_intr[22]  
udb_intr[23]  
udb_intr[24]  
udb_intr[25]  
udb_intr[26]  
udb_intr[27]  
udb_intr[28]  
udb_intr[29]  
udb_intr[30]  
udb_intr[31]  
Sleep (Pwr Mgr)  
PICU[0]  
PICU[1]  
PICU[2]  
PICU[3]  
PICU[4]  
PICU[5]  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
PICU[6]  
PICU[12]  
PICU[15]  
Comparators Combined  
Switched Caps Combined  
2
I C  
CAN  
Timer/Counter0  
Timer/Counter1  
Timer/Counter2  
Timer/Counter3  
USB SOF Int  
USB Arb Int  
USB Bus Int  
USB Endpoint[0]  
USB Endpoint Data  
Reserved  
LCD  
DFB Int  
Decimator Int  
PHUB Error Int  
EEPROM Fault Int  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 20 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
protecting your application from external access (see the  
“Device Security” section on page 63). For more information  
about how to take full advantage of the security features in  
PSoC, see the PSoC 3 TRM.  
5. Memory  
5.1 Static RAM  
CY8C36 SRAM is used for temporary data storage. Up to 8 KB  
of SRAM is provided and can be accessed by the 8051 or the  
DMA controller. See Memory Map on page 24. Simultaneous  
access of SRAM by the 8051 and the DMA controller is possible  
if different 4-KB blocks are accessed.  
Table 5-1. Flash Protection  
Protection  
Setting  
Allowed  
Not Allowed  
Unprotected  
External read and write  
+ internal read and write  
5.2 Flash Program Memory  
Factory  
Upgrade  
External write + internal External read  
read and write  
Flash memory in PSoC devices provides nonvolatile storage for  
user firmware, user configuration data, bulk data storage, and  
optional ECC data. The main flash memory area contains up to  
64 KB of user program space.  
Field Upgrade Internal read and write External read and  
write  
Up to an additional 8 KB of flash space is available for ECC. If  
ECC is not used this space can store device configuration data  
and bulk user data. User code may not be run out of the ECC  
flash memory section. ECC can correct one bit error and detect  
two bit errors per 8 bytes of firmware memory; an interrupt can  
be generated when an error is detected.  
Full Protection Internal read  
External read and  
write + internal write  
Disclaimer  
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on  
Cypress devices.  
The CPU reads instructions located in flash through a cache  
controller. This improves instruction execution rate and reduces  
system power consumption by requiring less frequent flash  
access. The cache has 8 lines at 64 bytes per line for a total of  
512 bytes. It is fully associative, automatically controls flash  
power, and can be enabled or disabled. If ECC is enabled, the  
cache controller also performs error checking and correction,  
and interrupt generation.  
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their  
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family  
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the  
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be  
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code  
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,  
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any  
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of  
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are  
guaranteeing the product as ‘unbreakable’. Cypress is willing to  
work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of  
their code. Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Cypress  
are committed to continuously improving the code protection  
features of our products.  
Flash programming is performed through a special interface and  
preempts code execution out of flash. The flash programming  
interface performs flash erasing, programming and setting code  
protection levels. Flash in-system serial programming (ISSP),  
typically used for production programming, is possible through  
both the SWD and JTAG interfaces. In-system programming,  
typically used for bootloaders, is also possible using serial  
interfaces such as I2C, USB, UART, and SPI, or any  
communications protocol.  
5.4 EEPROM  
PSoC EEPROM memory is a byte-addressable nonvolatile  
memory. The CY8C36 has up to 2 KB of EEPROM memory to  
store user data. Reads from EEPROM are random access at the  
byte level. Reads are done directly; writes are done by sending  
write commands to an EEPROM programming interface. CPU  
code execution can continue from flash during EEPROM writes.  
EEPROM is erasable and writeable at the row level. The  
EEPROM is divided into 128 rows of 16 bytes each. The CPU  
can not execute out of EEPROM. There is no ECC hardware  
associated with EEPROM. If ECC is required it must be handled  
in firmware.  
5.3 Flash Security  
All PSoC devices include a flexible flash-protection model that  
prevents access and visibility to on-chip flash memory. This  
prevents duplication or reverse engineering of proprietary code.  
Flash memory is organized in blocks, where each block contains  
256 bytes of program or data and 32 bytes of ECC or  
configuration data. A total of up to 256 blocks is provided on  
64-KB flash devices.  
The device offers the ability to assign one of four protection  
levels to each row of flash. Table 5-1 lists the protection modes  
available. Flash protection levels can only be changed by  
performing a complete flash erase. The Full Protection and Field  
Upgrade settings disable external access (through a debugging  
tool such as PSoC Creator, for example). If your application  
requires code update through a bootloader, then use the Field  
Upgrade setting. Use the Unprotected setting only when no  
security is needed in your application. The PSoC device also  
offers an advanced security feature called Device Security which  
permanently disables all test, programming, and debug ports,  
It can take as much as 20 milliseconds to write to EEPROM or  
flash. During this time the device should not be reset, or  
unexpected changes may be made to portions of EEPROM or  
flash. Reset sources (see Section 6.3.1) include XRES pin,  
software reset, and watchdog; care should be taken to make  
sure that these are not inadvertently activated. Also, the low  
voltage detect circuits should be configured to generate an  
interrupt instead of a reset.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 21 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
5.5 Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs)  
PSoC has a 4-byte array of nonvolatile latches (NVLs) that are used to configure the device at reset. The NVL register map is shown  
in Table 5-2.  
Table 5-2. Device Configuration NVL Register Map  
Register Address  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x00  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
PRT3RDM[1:0]  
PRT12RDM[1:0]  
PRT2RDM[1:0]  
PRT6RDM[1:0]  
PRT1RDM[1:0]  
PRT5RDM[1:0]  
PRT0RDM[1:0]  
PRT4RDM[1:0]  
PRT15RDM[1:0]  
XRESMEN  
DBGEN  
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]  
ECCEN  
DPS[1:0]  
CFGSPEED  
The details for individual fields and their factory default settings are shown in Table 5-3:.  
Table 5-3. Fields and Factory Default Settings  
Field  
Description  
Settings  
PRTxRDM[1:0]  
Controls reset drive mode of the corresponding IO port. 00b (default) - high impedance analog  
See “Reset Configuration” on page 39. All pins of the port 01b - high impedance digital  
are set to the same mode.  
10b - resistive pull up  
11b - resistive pull down  
XRESMEN  
Controls whether pin P1[2] is used as a GPIO or as an  
external reset. See “Pin Descriptions” on page 9, XRES 1 (default for 48-pin parts) - external reset  
0 (default for 68-pin and 100-pin parts) - GPIO  
description.  
DBGEN  
Debug Enable allows access to the debug system, for  
third-party programmers.  
0 - access disabled  
1 (default) - access enabled  
DPS{1:0]  
Controls the usage of various P1 pins as a debug port. 00b - 5-wire JTAG  
See “Programming, Debug Interfaces, Resources” on  
page 60.  
01b (default) - 4-wire JTAG  
10b - SWD  
11b - debug ports disabled  
ECCEN  
Controls whether ECC flash is used for ECC or for general 0 - ECC disabled  
configuration and data storage. See “Flash Program  
1 (default) - ECC enabled  
See the TRM for details.  
Memory” on page 21.  
DIG_PHS_DLY[3:0]  
Selects the digital clock phase delay.  
Although PSoC Creator provides support for modifying the device configuration NVLs, the number of NVL erase / write cycles is limited  
– see Nonvolatile Latches (NVL) on page 120.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 22 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
5.6 External Memory Interface  
CY8C36 provides an EMIF for connecting to external memory  
devices. The connection allows read and write accesses to  
external memories. The EMIF operates in conjunction with  
UDBs, I/O ports, and other hardware to generate external  
memory address and control signals. At 33 MHz, each memory  
access cycle takes four bus clock cycles. Figure 5-1 is the EMIF  
block diagram. The EMIF supports synchronous and  
asynchronous memories. The CY8C36 supports only one type  
of external memory device at a time. External memory can be  
accessed through the 8051 xdata space; up to 24 address bits  
can be used. See “xdata Space” section on page 25. The  
memory can be 8 or 16 bits wide.  
Figure 5-1. EMIF Block Diagram  
External_MEM_ ADDR[23:0]  
IO  
Address Signals  
PORTs  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
External_MEM_ DATA[15:0]  
IO  
Data Signals  
IO IF  
PORTs  
Control Signals  
Control  
IO  
PORTs  
PHUB  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
DSI Dynamic Output  
Control  
UDB  
DSI to Port  
Other  
EM Control  
Signals  
Control  
Signals  
Data,  
Address,  
and Control  
Signals  
EMIF  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 23 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 5-2. 8051 Internal Data Space  
5.7 Memory Map  
The CY8C36 8051 memory map is very similar to the MCS-51  
memory map.  
0x00  
0x1F  
0x20  
0x2F  
0x30  
4 Banks, R0-R7 Each  
Bit Addressable Area  
5.7.1 Code Space  
The CY8C36 8051 code space is 64 KB. Only main flash exists  
in this space. See the Flash Program Memory on page 21.  
Lower Core RAM Shared with Stack Space  
(direct and indirect addressing)  
5.7.2 Internal Data Space  
0x7F  
0x80  
The CY8C36 8051 internal data space is 384 bytes, compressed  
within a 256-byte space. This space consists of 256 bytes of  
RAM (in addition to the SRAM mentioned in Static RAM on page  
21) and a 128-byte space for special function registers (SFR).  
See Figure 5-2. The lowest 32 bytes are used for 4 banks of  
registers R0-R7. The next 16 bytes are bit-addressable.  
SFR  
Upper Core RAM Shared  
with Stack Space  
Special Function Registers  
(direct addressing)  
(indirect addressing)  
0xFF  
In addition to the register or bit address modes used with the  
lower 48 bytes, the lower 128 bytes can be accessed with direct  
or indirect addressing. With direct addressing mode, the upper  
128 bytes map to the SFRs. With indirect addressing mode, the  
upper 128 bytes map to RAM. Stack operations use indirect  
addressing; the 8051 stack space is 256 bytes. See the  
“Addressing Modes” section on page 10.  
5.7.3 SFRs  
The SFR space provides access to frequently accessed registers. The memory map for the SFR memory space is shown in Table 5-4.  
Table 5-4. SFR Map  
Address  
0×F8 SFRPRT15DR  
0×F0  
0/8  
1/9  
SFRPRT15PS  
2/A  
SFRPRT15SEL  
SFRPRT12SEL  
MXAX  
3/B  
4/C  
5/D  
6/E  
7/F  
B
0×E8 SFRPRT12DR  
0×E0 ACC  
SFRPRT12PS  
0×D8 SFRPRT6DR  
0×D0 PSW  
SFRPRT6PS  
SFRPRT6SEL  
0×C8 SFRPRT5DR  
0×C0 SFRPRT4DR  
0×B8  
SFRPRT5PS  
SFRPRT4PS  
SFRPRT5SEL  
SFRPRT4SEL  
0×B0 SFRPRT3DR  
0×A8 IE  
SFRPRT3PS  
SFRPRT3SEL  
0×A0 P2AX  
SFRPRT1SEL  
SFRPRT2SEL  
0×98 SFRPRT2DR  
0×90 SFRPRT1DR  
SFRPRT2PS  
SFRPRT1PS  
SFRPRT0PS  
SP  
DPX0  
DPX1  
0×88  
SFRPRT0SEL  
DPL0  
0×80 SFRPRT0DR  
DPH0  
DPL1  
DPH1  
DPS  
The CY8C36 family provides the standard set of registers found on industry standard 8051 devices. In addition, the CY8C36 devices  
add SFRs to provide direct access to the I/O ports on the device. The following sections describe the SFRs added to the CY8C36  
family.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 24 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
5.7.4 XData Space Access SFRs  
5.7.5.1 xdata Space  
The 8051 core features dual DPTR registers for faster data  
transfer operations. The data pointer select SFR, DPS, selects  
which data pointer register, DPTR0 or DPTR1, is used for the  
following instructions:  
The 8051 xdata space is 24-bit, or 16 MB in size. The majority of  
this space is not ‘external’—it is used by on-chip components.  
See Table 5-5. External, that is, off-chip, memory can be  
accessed using the EMIF. See External Memory Interface on  
page 23.  
MOVX @DPTR, A  
MOVX A, @DPTR  
MOVC A, @A+DPTR  
JMP @A+DPTR  
INC DPTR  
Table 5-5. XDATA Data Address Map  
Address Range  
0×00 0000 – 0×00 1FFF  
0×00 4000 – 0×00 42FF  
0×00 4300 – 0×00 43FF  
0×00 4400 – 0×00 44FF  
0×00 4500 – 0×00 45FF  
0×00 4700 – 0×00 47FF  
0×00 4800 - 0×00 48FF  
0×00 4900 – 0×00 49FF  
0×00 4E00 – 0×00 4EFF  
0×00 4F00 – 0×00 4FFF  
0×00 5000 – 0×00 51FF  
0×00 5400 – 0×00 54FF  
0×00 5800 – 0×00 5FFF  
0×00 6000 – 0×00 60FF  
0×00 6400 – 0×00 6FFF  
0×00 7000 – 0×00 7FFF  
0×00 8000 – 0×00 8FFF  
0×00 A000 – 0×00 A400  
0×00 C000 – 0×00 C800  
0×01 0000 – 0×01 FFFF  
Purpose  
SRAM  
Clocking, PLLs, and oscillators  
Power management  
Interrupt controller  
Ports interrupt control  
Flash programming interface  
Cache controller  
MOV DPTR, #data16  
The extended data pointer SFRs, DPX0, DPX1, MXAX, and  
P2AX, hold the most significant parts of memory addresses  
during access to the xdata space. These SFRs are used only  
with the MOVX instructions.  
During a MOVX instruction using the DPTR0/DPTR1 register,  
the most significant byte of the address is always equal to the  
contents of DPX0/DPX1.  
I2C controller  
Decimator  
Fixed timer/counter/PWMs  
I/O ports control  
During a MOVX instruction using the R0 or R1 register, the most  
significant byte of the address is always equal to the contents of  
MXAX, and the next most significant byte is always equal to the  
contents of P2AX.  
EMIF control registers  
Analog subsystem interface  
USB controller  
5.7.5 I/O Port SFRs  
The I/O ports provide digital input sensing, output drive, pin  
interrupts, connectivity for analog inputs and outputs, LCD, and  
access to peripherals through the DSI. Full information on I/O  
ports is found in I/O System and Routing on page 33.  
UDB Working Registers  
PHUB configuration  
EEPROM  
I/O ports are linked to the CPU through the PHUB and are also  
available in the SFRs. Using the SFRs allows faster access to a  
limited set of I/O port registers, while using the PHUB allows boot  
configuration and access to all I/O port registers.  
CAN  
DFB  
Digital Interconnect  
configuration  
Each SFR supported I/O port provides three SFRs:  
0×05 0220 – 0×05 02F0  
0×08 0000 – 0×08 1FFF  
0×80 0000 – 0×FF FFFF  
Debug controller  
SFRPRTxDR sets the output data state of the port (where × is  
port number and includes ports 0–6, 12 and 15).  
Flash ECC bytes  
External memory interface  
The SFRPRTxSEL selects whether the PHUB PRTxDR  
register or the SFRPRTxDR controls each pin’s output buffer  
within the port. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is high, the  
corresponding SFRPRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state for that  
pin. If a SFRPRTxSEL[y] bit is low, the corresponding  
PRTxDR[y] bit sets the output state of the pin (where y varies  
from 0 to 7).  
The SFRPRTxPS is a read only register that contains pin state  
values of the port pins.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 25 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Key features of the clocking system include:  
6. System Integration  
Seven general purpose clock sources  
3- to 62-MHz IMO, ±1% at 3 MHz  
4- to 25-MHz external crystal oscillator (MHzECO)  
Clock doubler provides a doubled clock frequency output for  
the USB block, see USB Clock Domain on page 28.  
DSI signal from an external I/O pin or other logic  
24- to 67-MHz fractional PLL sourced from IMO, MHzECO,  
or DSI  
6.1 Clocking System  
The clocking system generates, divides, and distributes clocks  
throughout the PSoC system. For the majority of systems, no  
external crystal is required. The IMO and PLL together can  
generate up to a 66 MHz clock, accurate to ±1 percent over  
voltage and temperature. Additional internal and external clock  
sources allow each design to optimize accuracy, power, and  
cost. Any of the clock sources can be used to generate other  
clock frequencies in the 16-bit clock dividers and UDBs for  
anything the user wants, for example a UART baud rate  
generator.  
1-kHz, 33-kHz, 100-kHz ILO for WDT and sleep timer  
32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (kHzECO) for RTC  
IMO has a USB mode that auto locks to the USB bus clock  
requiring no external crystal for USB (USB equipped parts only)  
Clock generation and distribution is automatically configured  
through the PSoC Creator IDE graphical interface. This is based  
on the complete system’s requirements. It greatly speeds the  
design process. PSoC Creator allows you to build clocking  
systems with minimal input. You can specify desired clock  
frequencies and accuracies, and the software locates or builds a  
clock that meets the required specifications. This is possible  
because of the programmability inherent in PSoC.  
Independently sourced clock in all clock dividers  
Eight 16-bit clock dividers for the digital system  
Four 16-bit clock dividers for the analog system  
Dedicated 16-bit divider for the bus clock  
Dedicated 4-bit divider for the CPU clock  
Automatic clock configuration in PSoC Creator  
Table 6-1. Oscillator Summary  
Source  
Fmin  
Tolerance at Fmin  
Fmax Tolerance at Fmax  
Startup Time  
IMO  
3 MHz ±1% over voltage and temperature 62 MHz ±7%  
13 µs max  
MHzECO 4 MHz Crystal dependent  
25 MHz Crystal dependent  
66 MHz Input dependent  
67 MHz Input dependent  
48 MHz Input dependent  
100 kHz –55%, +100%  
32 kHz Crystal dependent  
5 ms typ, max is crystal dependent  
Input dependent  
DSI  
PLL  
0 MHz Input dependent  
24 MHz Input dependent  
48 MHz Input dependent  
1 kHz –50%, +100%  
250 µs max  
Doubler  
ILO  
1 µs max  
15 ms max in lowest power mode  
500 ms typ, max is crystal dependent  
kHzECO  
32 kHz Crystal dependent  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 26 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 6-1. Clocking Subsystem  
External IO  
or DSI  
0-66 MHz  
3-62 MHz  
IMO  
4-25 MHz  
ECO  
1,33,100 kHz  
ILO  
32 kHz ECO  
CPU  
Clock  
CPU Clock Divider  
4 bit  
48 MHz  
Doubler for  
USB  
24-67 MHz  
PLL  
Master  
Mux  
Bus  
Clock  
Bus Clock Divider  
16 bit  
s
k
e
w
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
s
k
e
w
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
7
s
k
e
w
7
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
s
k
e
w
Analog Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
Digital Clock  
Divider 16 bit  
6.1.1 Internal Oscillators  
used until lock is complete and signaled with a lock bit. The lock  
signal can be routed through the DSI to generate an interrupt.  
Disable the PLL before entering low-power modes.  
6.1.1.1 Internal Main Oscillator  
In most designs the IMO is the only clock source required, due  
to its ±1-percent accuracy. The IMO operates with no external  
components and outputs a stable clock. A factory trim for each  
frequency range is stored in the device. With the factory trim,  
tolerance varies from ±1 percent at 3 MHz, up to ±7 percent at  
62 MHz. The IMO, in conjunction with the PLL, allows generation  
of other clocks up to the device's maximum frequency (see PLL).  
The IMO provides clock outputs at 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 62 MHz.  
6.1.1.4 Internal Low-Speed Oscillator  
The ILO provides clock frequencies for low-power consumption,  
including the watchdog timer, and sleep timer. The ILO  
generates up to three different clocks: 1 kHz, 33 kHz, and  
100 kHz. The 1-kHz clock (CLK1K) is typically used for a  
background ‘heartbeat’ timer. This clock inherently lends itself to  
low-power supervisory operations such as the watchdog timer  
and long sleep intervals using the central timewheel (CTW).  
6.1.1.2 Clock Doubler  
The central timewheel is a 1-kHz, free running, 13-bit counter  
clocked by the ILO. The central timewheel is always enabled,  
except in hibernate mode and when the CPU is stopped during  
debug on chip mode. It can be used to generate periodic  
interrupts for timing purposes or to wake the system from a  
low-power mode. Firmware can reset the central timewheel.  
Systems that require accurate timing should use the RTC  
capability instead of the central timewheel.  
The clock doubler outputs a clock at twice the frequency of the  
input clock. The doubler works at input frequency of 24 MHz,  
providing 48 MHz for the USB. It can be configured to use a clock  
from the IMO, MHzECO, or the DSI (external pin).  
6.1.1.3 PLL  
The PLL allows low-frequency, high-accuracy clocks to be  
multiplied to higher frequencies. This is a trade off between  
higher clock frequency and accuracy and, higher power  
consumption and increased startup time.  
The 100-kHz clock (CLK100K) can be used as a low power  
master clock. It can also generate time intervals using the fast  
timewheel.  
The PLL block provides a mechanism for generating clock  
frequencies based upon a variety of input sources. The PLL  
outputs clock frequencies in the range of 24 to 67 MHz. Its input  
and feedback dividers supply 4032 discrete ratios to create  
almost any desired clock frequency. The accuracy of the PLL  
output depends on the accuracy of the PLL input source. The  
most common PLL use is to multiply the IMO clock at 3 MHz,  
where it is most accurate, to generate the other clocks up to the  
device’s maximum frequency.  
The fast timewheel is a 5-bit counter, clocked by the 100-kHz  
clock. It features programmable settings and automatically  
resets when the terminal count is reached. An optional interrupt  
can be generated each time the terminal count is reached. This  
enables flexible, periodic interrupts of the CPU at a higher rate  
than is allowed using the central timewheel.  
The 33-kHz clock (CLK33K) comes from a divide-by-3 operation  
on CLK100K. This output can be used as a reduced accuracy  
version of the 32.768-kHz ECO clock with no need for a crystal.  
The PLL achieves phase lock within 250 µs (verified by bit  
setting). It can be configured to use a clock from the IMO,  
MHzECO or DSI (external pin). The PLL clock source can be  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 27 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
6.1.2 External Oscillators  
capacitance, should equal the crystal CL value. For more  
information, refer to application note AN54439: PSoC 3 and  
PSoC 5 External Oscillators. See also pin capacitance  
specifications in the “GPIO” section on page 74.  
6.1.2.1 MHz External Crystal Oscillator  
The MHzECO provides high frequency, high precision clocking  
using an external crystal (see Figure 6-2). It supports a wide  
variety of crystal types, in the range of 4 to 25 MHz. When used  
in conjunction with the PLL, it can generate other clocks up to the  
device's maximum frequency (see PLL). The GPIO pins  
connecting to the external crystal and capacitors are fixed.  
MHzECO accuracy depends on the crystal chosen.  
6.1.2.3 Digital System Interconnect  
The DSI provides routing for clocks taken from external clock  
oscillators connected to I/O. The oscillators can also be  
generated within the device in the digital system and UDBs.  
While the primary DSI clock input provides access to all clocking  
resources, up to eight other DSI clocks (internally or externally  
generated) may be routed directly to the eight digital clock  
dividers. This is only possible if there are multiple precision clock  
sources.  
Figure 6-2. MHzECO Block Diagram  
XCLK_MHZ  
4 - 25 MHz  
Crystal Osc  
6.1.3 Clock Distribution  
All seven clock sources are inputs to the central clock distribution  
system. The distribution system is designed to create multiple  
high precision clocks. These clocks are customized for the  
design’s requirements and eliminate the common problems  
found with limited resolution prescalers attached to peripherals.  
The clock distribution system generates several types of clock  
trees.  
Xo  
Xi  
(Pin P15[0])  
(Pin P15[1])  
4 –25 MHz  
crystal  
External  
Components  
The master clock is used to select and supply the fastest clock  
in the system for general clock requirements and clock  
synchronization of the PSoC device.  
Capacitors  
Bus clock 16-bit divider uses the master clock to generate the  
bus clock used for data transfers. Bus clock is the source clock  
for the CPU clock divider.  
6.1.2.2 32.768-kHz ECO  
The 32.768-kHz external crystal oscillator (32kHzECO) provides  
precision timing with minimal power consumption using an  
external 32.768-kHz watch crystal (see Figure 6-3). The  
32kHzECO also connects directly to the sleep timer and provides  
the source for the RTC. The RTC uses a 1-second interrupt to  
implement the RTC functionality in firmware.  
Eight fully programmable 16-bit clock dividers generate digital  
system clocks for general use in the digital system, as  
configured by the design’s requirements. Digital system clocks  
can generate custom clocks derived from any of the seven  
clock sources for any purpose. Examples include baud rate  
generators, accurate PWM periods, and timer clocks, and  
many others. If more than eight digital clock dividers are  
required, theUDBsandfixedfunctiontimer/counter/PWMscan  
also generate clocks.  
The oscillator works in two distinct power modes. This allows  
users to trade off power consumption with noise immunity from  
neighboring circuits. The GPIO pins connected to the external  
crystal and capacitors are fixed.  
Four16-bitclockdividersgenerateclocksfortheanalogsystem  
components that require clocking, such as ADC and mixers.  
The analog clock dividers include skew control to ensure that  
critical analog events do not occur simultaneously with digital  
switching events. This is done to reduce analog system noise.  
Figure 6-3. 32kHzECO Block Diagram  
XCLK32K  
32 kHz  
Crystal Osc  
Each clock divider consists of an 8-input multiplexer, a 16-bit  
clock divider (divide by 2 and higher) that generates ~50 percent  
duty cycle clocks, master clock resynchronization logic, and  
deglitch logic. The outputs from each digital clock tree can be  
routed into the digital system interconnect and then brought back  
into the clock system as an input, allowing clock chaining of up  
to 32 bits.  
Xo  
Xi  
(Pin P15[2])  
(Pin P15[3])  
32 kHz  
crystal  
External  
Components  
6.1.4 USB Clock Domain  
Capacitors  
The USB clock domain is unique in that it operates largely  
asynchronously from the main clock network. The USB logic  
contains a synchronous bus interface to the chip, while running  
on an asynchronous clock to process USB data. The USB logic  
requires a 48 MHz frequency. This frequency can be generated  
from different sources, including DSI clock at 48 MHz or doubled  
value of 24 MHz from internal oscillator, DSI signal, or crystal  
oscillator.  
It is recommended that the external 32.768-kHz watch crystal  
have a load capacitance (CL) of 6 pF or 12.5 pF. Check the  
crystal manufacturer's datasheet. The two external capacitors,  
CL1 and CL2, are typically of the same value, and their total  
capacitance, CL1CL2 / (CL1 + CL2), including pin and trace  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 28 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
6.2 Power System  
The power system consists of separate analog, digital, and I/O supply pins, labeled VDDA, VDDD, and VDDIOX, respectively. It also  
includes two internal 1.8-V regulators that provide the digital (VCCD) and analog (VCCA) supplies for the internal core logic. The  
output pins of the regulators (VCCD and VCCA) and the VDDIO pins must have capacitors connected as shown in Figure 6-4. The  
two VCCD pins must be shorted together, with as short a trace as possible, and connected to a 1-µF ±10-percent X5R capacitor. The  
power system also contains a sleep regulator, an I2C regulator, and a hibernate regulator.  
Figure 6-4. PSoC Power System  
µF  
VDDD  
1
VDDIO2  
VDDIO0  
0.1 µF  
0.1 µF  
I/O Supply  
I/O Supply  
VDDIO0  
0.1 µF  
I2C  
Regulator  
Sleep  
Regulator  
Digital  
VDDA  
Domain  
VDDA  
VCCA  
Analog  
Regulator  
0.1 µF  
Digital  
Regulators  
VSSD  
.
µF  
1
VSSA  
Analog  
Domain  
Hibernate  
Regulator  
I/O Supply  
I/O Supply  
0.1µF  
0.1 µF  
0.1 µF  
VDDD  
VDDIO1  
VDDIO3  
Note The two VCCD pins must be connected together with as short a trace as possible. A trace under the device is recommended,  
as shown in Figure 2-6 on page 9.  
You can power the device in internally regulated mode, where the voltage applied to the VDDx pins is as high as 5.5 V, and the internal  
regulators provide the core voltages. In this mode, do not apply power to the VCCx pins, and do not tie the VDDx pins to the VCCx  
pins.  
You can also power the device in externally regulated mode, that is, by directly powering the VCCD and VCCA pins. In this configuration,  
the VDDD pins should be shorted to the VCCD pins and the VDDA pin should be shorted to the VCCA pin. The allowed supply range in  
this configuration is 1.71 V to 1.89 V. After power up in this configuration, the internal regulators are on by default, and should be  
disabled to reduce power consumption.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 29 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
6.2.1 Power Modes  
Active is the main processing mode. Its functionality is  
configurable. Each power controllable subsystem is enabled or  
disabled by using separate power configuration template  
registers. In alternate active mode, fewer subsystems are  
enabled, reducing power. In sleep mode most resources are  
disabled regardless of the template settings. Sleep mode is  
optimized to provide timed sleep intervals and Real Time Clock  
functionality. The lowest power mode is hibernate, which retains  
register and SRAM state, but no clocks, and allows wakeup only  
from I/O pins. Figure 6-5 on page 31 illustrates the allowable  
transitions between power modes. Sleep and hibernate modes  
should not be entered until all VDDIO supplies are at valid  
voltage levels.  
PSoC 3 devices have four different power modes, as shown in  
Table 6-2 and Table 6-3. The power modes allow a design to  
easily provide required functionality and processing power while  
simultaneously minimizing power consumption and maximizing  
battery life in low-power and portable devices.  
PSoC 3 power modes, in order of decreasing power  
consumption are:  
Active  
Alternate Active  
Sleep  
Hibernate  
Table 6-2. Power Modes  
Power Modes  
Description  
EntryCondition WakeupSource Active Clocks  
Regulator  
Active  
Primary mode of operation, all Wakeup, reset, Any interrupt  
Any  
All regulators available.  
peripherals available  
(programmable)  
manual register  
entry  
(programmable) Digital and analog  
regulators can be disabled  
if external regulation used.  
Alternate  
Active  
Similar to Active mode, and is  
typically configured to have  
fewer peripherals active to  
reduce power. One possible  
configuration is to use the UDBs  
for processing, with the CPU  
turned off  
Manual register Any interrupt  
entry  
Any  
All regulators available.  
(programmable) Digital and analog  
regulators can be disabled  
if external regulation used.  
Sleep  
All subsystems automatically  
disabled  
Manual register Comparator,  
entry  
ILO/kHzECO  
Both digital and analog  
regulators buzzed.  
Digital and analog  
PICU, I2C, RTC,  
CTW, LVD  
regulators can be disabled  
if external regulation used.  
Hibernate  
All subsystems automatically  
disabled  
Manual register PICU  
entry  
Only hibernate regulator  
active.  
Lowest power consuming mode  
with all peripherals and internal  
regulators disabled, except  
hibernate regulator is enabled  
Configuration and memory  
contents retained  
Table 6-3. Power Modes Wakeup Time and Power Consumption  
Sleep  
Modes  
Wakeup  
Time  
Current  
(typ)  
Code  
Digital  
Analog  
ClockSources  
Available  
Reset  
Sources  
Wakeup Sources  
Execution Resources Resources  
1.2 mA[11]  
Yes  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
All  
Active  
Alternate  
Active  
User  
defined  
All  
All  
<15 µs  
1 µA  
No  
I2C  
Comparator ILO/kHzECO  
Comparator,  
PICU, I2C, RTC,  
CTW, LVD  
XRES, LVD,  
WDR  
Sleep  
Hibernate <100 µs  
200 nA  
No  
None  
None  
None  
PICU  
XRES  
Note  
11. Bus clock off. Execute from cache at 6 MHz. See Table 11-2 on page 66.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 30 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 6-5. Power Mode Transitions  
6.2.1.5 Wakeup Events  
Wakeup events are configurable and can come from an interrupt  
or device reset. A wakeup event restores the system to active  
mode. Firmware enabled interrupt sources include internally  
generated interrupts, power supervisor, central timewheel, and  
I/O interrupts. Internal interrupt sources can come from a variety  
of peripherals, such as analog comparators and UDBs. The  
central timewheel provides periodic interrupts to allow the  
system to wake up, poll peripherals, or perform real-time  
functions. Reset event sources include the external reset I/O pin  
(XRES), WDT, and precision reset (PRES).  
Active  
Manual  
Sleep  
Hibernate  
Buzz  
6.3 Reset  
Alternate  
Active  
CY8C36 has multiple internal and external reset sources  
available. The reset sources are:  
Power source monitoring – The analog and digital power  
voltages, VDDA, VDDD, VCCA, and VCCD are monitored in  
several different modes during power up, active mode, and  
sleep mode (buzzing). If any of the voltages goes outside  
predetermined ranges then a reset is generated. The monitors  
are programmable to generate an interrupt to the processor  
under certain conditions before reaching the reset thresholds.  
6.2.1.1 Active Mode  
Active mode is the primary operating mode of the device. When  
in active mode, the active configuration template bits control  
which available resources are enabled or disabled. When a  
resource is disabled, the digital clocks are gated, analog bias  
currents are disabled, and leakage currents are reduced as  
appropriate. User firmware can dynamically control subsystem  
power by setting and clearing bits in the active configuration  
template. The CPU can disable itself, in which case the CPU is  
automatically reenabled at the next wakeup event.  
External – The device can be reset from an external source by  
pulling the reset pin (XRES) low. The XRES pin includes an  
internal pull-up to VDDIO1. VDDD, VDDA, and VDDIO1 must  
all have voltage applied before the part comes out of reset.  
When a wakeup event occurs, the global mode is always  
returned to active, and the CPU is automatically enabled,  
regardless of its template settings. Active mode is the default  
global power mode upon boot.  
Watchdog timer – A watchdog timer monitors the execution of  
instructions by the processor. If the watchdog timer is not reset  
by firmware within a certain period of time, the watchdog timer  
generates a reset.  
6.2.1.2 Alternate Active Mode  
Software – The device can be reset under program control.  
Alternate Active mode is very similar to Active mode. In alternate  
active mode, fewer subsystems are enabled, to reduce power  
consumption. One possible configuration is to turn off the CPU  
and flash, and run peripherals at full speed.  
Figure 6-6. Resets  
Vddd Vdda  
6.2.1.3 Sleep Mode  
Power  
Processor  
Interrupt  
Sleep mode reduces power consumption when a resume time of  
15 µs is acceptable. The wake time is used to ensure that the  
regulator outputs are stable enough to directly enter active  
mode.  
Voltage  
Level  
Monitors  
Reset  
Pin  
6.2.1.4 Hibernate Mode  
External  
Reset  
Controller  
System  
Reset  
Reset  
In hibernate mode nearly all of the internal functions are  
disabled. Internal voltages are reduced to the minimal level to  
keep vital systems alive. Configuration state is preserved in  
hibernate mode and SRAM memory is retained. GPIOs  
configured as digital outputs maintain their previous values and  
external GPIO pin interrupt settings are preserved. The device  
can only return from hibernate mode in response to an external  
I/O interrupt. The resume time from hibernate mode is less than  
100 µs.  
Watchdog  
Timer  
Software  
Reset  
To achieve an extremely low current, the hibernate regulator has  
limited capacity. This limits the frequency of any signal present  
on the input pins - no GPIO should toggle at a rate greater than  
10 kHz while in hibernate mode. If pins must be toggled at a high  
rate while in a low power mode, use sleep mode instead.  
Register  
The term device reset indicates that the processor as well as  
analog and digital peripherals and registers are reset.  
A reset status register shows some of the resets or power voltage  
monitoring interrupts. The program may examine this register to  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 31 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
detect and report certain exception conditions. This register is  
cleared after a power-on reset. For details see the Technical  
Reference Manual.  
Table 6-4. Analog/Digital Low Voltage Interrupt, Analog High  
Voltage Interrupt  
Normal Voltage  
Interrupt Supply  
Available Trip Settings  
6.3.1 Reset Sources  
Range  
DLVI  
ALVI  
AHVI  
VDDD 1.71 V–5.5 V  
VDDA 1.71 V–5.5 V  
VDDA 1.71 V–5.5 V  
1.70 V–5.45 V in 250 mV  
increments  
6.3.1.1 Power Voltage Level Monitors  
IPOR – Initial power-on reset  
1.70 V–5.45 V in 250 mV  
increments  
At initial power on, IPOR monitors the power voltages VDDD  
,
VDDA, VCCD and VCCA. The trip level is not precise. It is set to  
5.75 V  
approximately 1 volt, which is below the lowest specified  
operating voltage but high enough for the internal circuits to be  
reset and to hold their reset state. The monitor generates a  
reset pulse that is at least 150 ns wide. It may be much wider  
if one or more of the voltages ramps up slowly.  
The monitors are disabled until after IPOR. During sleep mode  
these circuits are periodically activated (buzzed). If an interrupt  
occurs during buzzing then the system first enters its wakeup  
sequence. The interrupt is then recognized and may be  
serviced.  
If after the IPOR triggers either VDDX drops back below the  
trigger point, in a non-monotonic fashion, it must remain below  
that point for at least 10 µs. The hysteresis of the IPOR trigger  
point is typically 100 mV.  
The buzz frequency is adjustable, and should be set to be less  
than the minimum time that any voltage is expected to be out  
of range. For details on how to adjust the buzz frequency, see  
the TRM.  
After boot, the IPOR circuit is disabled and voltage supervision  
is handed off to the precise low-voltage reset (PRES) circuit.  
6.3.1.2 Other Reset Sources  
XRES – External reset  
PRES – Precise low voltage reset  
PSoC 3 has either a single GPIO pin that is configured as an  
external reset or a dedicated XRES pin. Either the dedicated  
XRES pin or the GPIO pin, if configured, holds the part in reset  
while held active (low). The response to an XRES is the same  
as to an IPOR reset.  
This circuit monitors the outputs of the analog and digital  
internal regulators after power up. The regulator outputs are  
compared to a precise reference voltage. The response to a  
PRES trip is identical to an IPOR reset.  
After PRES has been deasserted, at least 10 µs must elapse  
before it can be reasserted.  
After XRES has been deasserted, at least 10 µs must elapse  
before it can be reasserted.  
In normal operating mode, the program cannot disable the  
digital PRES circuit. The analog regulator can be disabled,  
which also disables the analog portion of the PRES. The PRES  
circuit is disabled automatically during sleep and hibernate  
modes, with one exception: During sleep mode the regulators  
are periodically activated (buzzed) to provide supervisory  
services and to reduce wakeup time. At these times the PRES  
circuit is also buzzed to allow periodic voltage monitoring.  
The external reset is active low. It includes an internal pull-up  
resistor. XRES is active during sleep and hibernate modes.  
SRES – Software reset  
A reset can be commanded under program control by setting  
a bit in the software reset register. This is done either directly  
by the program or indirectly by DMA access. The response to  
a SRES is the same as after an IPOR reset.  
Another register bit exists to disable this function.  
ALVI, DLVI, AHVI – Analog/digital low voltage interrupt, analog  
high voltage interrupt  
WRES – Watchdog timer reset  
The watchdog reset detects when the software program is no  
longer being executed correctly. To indicate to the watchdog  
timer that it is running correctly, the program must periodically  
reset the timer. If the timer is not reset before a user-specified  
amount of time, then a reset is generated.  
Note IPOR disables the watchdog function. The program must  
enable the watchdog function at an appropriate point in the  
code by setting a register bit. When this bit is set, it cannot be  
cleared again except by an IPOR power on reset event.  
Interrupt circuits are available to detect when VDDA and  
VDDD go outside a voltage range. For AHVI, VDDA is  
compared to a fixed trip level. For ALVI and DLVI, VDDA and  
VDDD are compared to trip levels that are programmable, as  
listed in Table 6-4. ALVI and DLVI can also be configured to  
generate a device reset instead of an interrupt.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 32 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Slew rate controlled digital output drive mode  
Access port control and configuration registers on either port  
basis or pin basis  
Separateportread(PS)andwrite(DR)dataregisterstoavoid  
read modify write errors  
6.4 I/O System and Routing  
PSoC I/Os are extremely flexible. Every GPIO has analog and  
digital I/O capability. All I/Os have a large number of drive modes,  
which are set at POR. PSoC also provides up to four individual  
I/O voltage domains through the VDDIO pins.  
Special functionality on a pin by pin basis  
There are two types of I/O pins on every device; those with USB  
provide a third type. Both GPIO and SIO provide similar digital  
functionality. The primary differences are their analog capability  
and drive strength. Devices that include USB also provide two  
USBIO pins that support specific USB functionality as well as  
limited GPIO capability.  
All I/O pins are available for use as digital inputs and outputs for  
both the CPU and digital peripherals. In addition, all I/O pins can  
generate an interrupt. The flexible and advanced capabilities of  
the PSoC I/O, combined with any signal to any pin routability,  
greatly simplify circuit design and board layout. All GPIO pins can  
be used for analog input, CapSense[12], and LCD segment drive,  
while SIO pins are used for voltages in excess of VDDA and for  
programmable output voltages.  
Additional features only provided on the GPIO pins:  
LCD segment drive on LCD equipped devices  
CapSense[12]  
Analog input and output capability  
Continuous 100 µA clamp current capability  
Standard drive strength down to 1.7 V  
Additional features only provided on SIO pins:  
Higher drive strength than GPIO  
Hot swap capability (5 V tolerance at any operating VDD  
Programmable and regulated high input and output drive  
levels down to 1.2 V  
No analog input, CapSense, or LCD capability  
Over voltage tolerance up to 5.5 V  
SIO can act as a general purpose analog comparator  
USBIO features:  
Full speed USB 2.0 compliant I/O  
Highest drive strength for general purpose use  
Input, output, or both for CPU and DMA  
Input, output, or both for digital peripherals  
Digital output (CMOS) drive mode  
Each pin can be an interrupt source configured as rising  
edge, falling edge, or both edges  
)
Features supported by both GPIO and SIO:  
User programmable port reset state  
SeparateI/OsuppliesandvoltagesforuptofourgroupsofI/O  
Digital peripherals use DSI to connect the pins  
Input or output or both for CPU and DMA  
Eight drive modes  
Every pin can be an interrupt source configured as rising  
edge, falling edge or both edges. If required, level sensitive  
interrupts are supported through the DSI  
Dedicated port interrupt vector for each port  
Note  
12. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 33 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 6-7. GPIO Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
‘x’ = Port Number  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
PRT[x]CTL  
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN  
PRT[x]PS  
Digital System Input  
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Input Buffer Disable  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
PRT[x]SLW  
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT  
Vddio Vddio  
Vddio  
PRT[x]DR  
0
1
In  
Digital System Output  
PRT[x]BYP  
Drive  
Logic  
PRT[x]DM2  
PRT[x]DM1  
PRT[x]DM0  
Slew  
Cntl  
PIN  
Bidirectional Control  
PRT[x]BIE  
OE  
Analog  
1
0
1
0
1
Capsense Global Control  
CAPS[x]CFG1  
Switches  
PRT[x]AG  
Analog Global Enable  
PRT[x]AMUX  
Analog Mux Enable  
LCD  
Display  
Data  
Logic & MUX  
PRT[x]LCD_COM_SEG  
PRT[x]LCD_EN  
LCD Bias Bus  
5
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 34 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 6-8. SIO Input/Output Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
‘x’ = Port Number  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
PRT[x]SIO_HYST_EN  
PRT[x]SIO_DIFF  
Buffer  
Thresholds  
Reference Level  
PRT[x]DBL_SYNC_IN  
PRT[x]PS  
Digital System Input  
PICU[x]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[x]INTSTAT  
Input Buffer Disable  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
Reference Level  
PRT[x]SIO_CFG  
PRT[x]SLW  
Driver  
Vhigh  
PRT[x]SYNC_OUT  
PRT[x]DR  
0
1
In  
Digital System Output  
PRT[x]BYP  
Drive  
Logic  
PRT[x]DM2  
PRT[x]DM1  
PRT[x]DM0  
Slew  
Cntl  
PIN  
Bidirectional Control  
PRT[x]BIE  
OE  
Figure 6-9. USBIO Block Diagram  
Digital Input Path  
Naming Convention  
‘y’ = Pin Number  
USB Receiver Circuitry  
PRT[15]DBL_SYNC_IN  
PRT[15]PS[6,7]  
USBIO_CR1[0,1]  
Digital System Input  
PICU[15]INTTYPE[y]  
PICU[15]INTSTAT  
Pin Interrupt Signal  
PICU[15]INTSTAT  
Interrupt  
Logic  
Digital Output Path  
PRT[15]SYNC_OUT  
USBIO_CR1[5]  
USB or I/O  
D+ 1.5 k  
D+ pin only  
Vddd Vddd Vddd  
USBIO_CR1[2]  
Vddd  
USB SIE Control for USB Mode  
PRT[15]DR1[7,6]  
0
1
In  
Digital System Output  
PRT[15]BYP  
5 k  
1.5 k  
Drive  
Logic  
PIN  
PRT[15]DM0[6]  
PRT[15]DM0[7]  
D+ Open  
Drain  
D- Open  
Drain  
PRT[15]DM1[6]  
PRT[15]DM1[7]  
D+ 5 k  
D- 5 k  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 35 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
6.4.1 Drive Modes  
Each GPIO and SIO pin is individually configurable into one of the eight drive modes listed in Table 6-5. Three configuration bits are  
used for each pin (DM[2:0]) and set in the PRTxDM[2:0] registers. Figure 6-10 depicts a simplified pin view based on each of the eight  
drive modes. Table 6-5 shows the I/O pin’s drive state based on the port data register value or digital array signal if bypass mode is  
selected. Note that the actual I/O pin voltage is determined by a combination of the selected drive mode and the load at the pin. For  
example, if a GPIO pin is configured for resistive pull-up mode and driven high while the pin is floating, the voltage measured at the  
pin is a high logic state. If the same GPIO pin is externally tied to ground then the voltage unmeasured at the pin is a low logic state.  
Figure 6-10. Drive Mode  
Vddio  
Vddio  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
Pin  
0. High Impedance  
Analog  
1. High Impedance  
Digital  
2. Resistive  
Pull Up  
3. Resistive  
Pull Down  
Vddio  
Vddio  
Vddio  
DR  
Pin  
PS  
DR  
Pin  
PS  
DR  
PS  
DR  
PS  
Pin  
Pin  
4. Open Drain,  
Drives Low  
5. Open Drain,  
Drives High  
6. Strong Drive  
7. Resistive  
Pull Up and Down  
Table 6-5. Drive Modes  
Diagram  
Drive Mode  
PRTxDM2  
PRTxDM1  
PRTxDM0  
PRTxDR = 1  
High Z  
PRTxDR = 0  
High Z  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
High impedance analog  
High Impedance digital  
Resistive pull-up[13]  
Resistive pull-down[13]  
Open drain, drives low  
Open drain, drive high  
Strong drive  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
High Z  
High Z  
Res High (5K)  
Strong High  
High Z  
Strong Low  
Res Low (5K)  
Strong Low  
High Z  
Strong High  
Strong High  
Res High (5K)  
Strong Low  
Res Low (5K)  
Resistive pull-up and pull-down[13]  
Note  
13. Resistive pull-up and pull-down are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 36 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
The USBIO pins (P15[7] and P15[6]), when enabled for I/O mode, have limited drive mode control. The drive mode is set using the  
PRT15.DM0[7, 6] register. A resistive pull option is also available at the USBIO pins, which can be enabled using the PRT15.DM1[7,  
6] register. When enabled for USB mode, the drive mode control has no impact on the configuration of the USB pins. Unlike the GPIO  
and SIO configurations, the port wide configuration registers do not configure the USB drive mode bits. Table 6-6 shows the drive  
mode configuration for the USBIO pins.  
Table 6-6. USBIO Drive Modes (P15[7] and P15[6])  
PRT15.DM1[7,6]  
Pull up enable  
PRT15.DM0[7,6]  
Drive Mode enable  
PRT15.DR[7,6] = 1  
PRT15.DR[7,6] = 0  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
High Z  
Strong Low  
Strong Low  
Strong Low  
Strong Low  
Open Drain, Strong Low  
Strong Outputs  
Strong High  
Res High (5k)  
Strong High  
Resistive Pull Up, Strong Low  
Strong Outputs  
High impedance analog  
6.4.2 Pin Registers  
The default reset state with both the output driver and digital  
input buffer turned off. This prevents any current from flowing  
in the I/O’s digital input buffer due to a floating voltage. This  
state is recommended for pins that are floating or that support  
an analog voltage. High impedance analog pins do not provide  
digital input functionality.  
Registers to configure and interact with pins come in two forms  
that may be used interchangeably.  
All I/O registers are available in the standard port form, where  
each bit of the register corresponds to one of the port pins. This  
register form is efficient for quickly reconfiguring multiple port  
pins at the same time.  
To achieve the lowest chip current in sleep modes, all I/Os  
must either be configured to the high impedance analog mode,  
or have their pins driven to a power supply rail by the PSoC  
device or by external circuitry.  
I/O registers are also available in pin form, which combines the  
eight most commonly used port register bits into a single register  
for each pin. This enables very fast configuration changes to  
individual pins with a single register write.  
High impedance digital  
6.4.3 Bidirectional Mode  
The input buffer is enabled for digital signal input. This is the  
standard high impedance (High Z) state recommended for  
digital inputs.  
High speed bidirectional capability allows pins to provide both  
the high impedance digital drive mode for input signals and a  
second user selected drive mode such as strong drive (set using  
PRT×DM[2:0] registers) for output signals on the same pin,  
based on the state of an auxiliary control bus signal. The  
bidirectional capability is useful for processor busses and  
communications interfaces such as the SPI Slave MISO pin that  
requires dynamic hardware control of the output buffer.  
Resistive pull-up or resistive pull-down  
Resistive pull-up or pull-down, respectively, provides a series  
resistance in one of the data states and strong drive in the  
other. Pins can be used for digital input and output in these  
modes. Interfacing to mechanical switches is a common  
application for these modes. Resistive pullup and pull-down  
are not available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
The auxiliary control bus routes up to 16 UDB or digital peripheral  
generated output enable signals to one or more pins.  
Open drain, drives high and open drain, drives low  
6.4.4 Slew Rate Limited Mode  
Open drain modes provide high impedance in one of the data  
states and strong drive in the other. Pins can be used for digital  
input and output in these modes. A common application for  
these modes is driving the I2C bus signal lines.  
GPIO and SIO pins have fast and slow output slew rate options  
for strong and open drain drive modes, not resistive drive modes.  
Because it results in reduced EMI, the slow edge rate option is  
recommended for signals that are not speed critical, generally  
less than 1 MHz. The fast slew rate is for signals between 1 MHz  
and 33 MHz. The slew rate is individually configurable for each  
pin, and is set by the PRT×SLW registers.  
Strong drive  
Provides a strong CMOS output drive in either high or low  
state. This is the standard output mode for pins. Strong Drive  
mode pins must not be used as inputs under normal  
circumstances. This mode is often used to drive digital output  
signals or external FETs.  
Resistive pull-up and pull-down  
Similar to the resistive pull-up and resistive pull-down modes  
except the pin is always in series with a resistor. The high data  
state is pull-up while the low data state is pull-down. This mode  
is most often used when other signals that may cause shorts  
can drive the bus. Resistive pullup and pull-down are not  
available with SIO in regulated output mode.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 37 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
6.4.5 Pin Interrupts  
6.4.9 CapSense  
All GPIO and SIO pins are able to generate interrupts to the  
system. All eight pins in each port interface to their own Port  
Interrupt Control Unit (PICU) and associated interrupt vector.  
Each pin of the port is independently configurable to detect rising  
edge, falling edge, both edge interrupts, or to not generate an  
interrupt.  
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be  
used to create CapSense buttons and sliders[14]. See the  
“CapSense” section on page 58 for more information.  
6.4.10 LCD Segment Drive  
This section applies only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may be  
used to generate Segment and Common drive signals for direct  
glass drive of LCD glass. See the “LCD Direct Drive” section on  
page 57 for details.  
Depending on the configured mode for each pin, each time an  
interrupt event occurs on a pin, its corresponding status bit of the  
interrupt status register is set to ‘1’ and an interrupt request is  
sent to the interrupt controller. Each PICU has its own interrupt  
vector in the interrupt controller and the pin status register  
providing easy determination of the interrupt source down to the  
pin level.  
6.4.11 Adjustable Output Level  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO port pins support the  
ability to provide a regulated high output level for interface to  
external signals that are lower in voltage than the SIO’s  
respective VDDIO. SIO pins are individually configurable to  
output either the standard VDDIO level or the regulated output,  
which is based on an internally generated reference. Typically a  
voltage DAC (VDAC) is used to generate the reference (see  
Figure 6-11). The “DAC” section on page 59 has more details on  
VDAC use and reference routing to the SIO pins. Resistive  
pullup and pull-down drive modes are not available with SIO in  
regulated output mode.  
Port pin interrupts remain active in all sleep modes allowing the  
PSoC device to wake from an externally generated interrupt.  
While level sensitive interrupts are not directly supported; UDB  
provide this functionality to the system when needed.  
6.4.6 Input Buffer Mode  
GPIO and SIO input buffers can be configured at the port level  
for the default CMOS input thresholds or the optional LVTTL  
input thresholds. All input buffers incorporate Schmitt triggers for  
input hysteresis. Additionally, individual pin input buffers can be  
disabled in any drive mode.  
6.4.12 Adjustable Input Level  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins by default support  
the standard CMOS and LVTTL input levels but also support a  
differential mode with programmable levels. SIO pins are  
grouped into pairs. Each pair shares a reference generator block  
which, is used to set the digital input buffer reference level for  
interface to external signals that differ in voltage from VDDIO.  
The reference sets the pins voltage threshold for a high logic  
level (see Figure 6-11). Available input thresholds are:  
6.4.7 I/O Power Supplies  
Up to four I/O pin power supplies are provided depending on the  
device and package. Each I/O supply must be less than or equal  
to the voltage on the chip’s analog (VDDA) pin. This feature  
allows users to provide different I/O voltage levels for different  
pins on the device. Refer to the specific device package pinout  
to determine VDDIO capability for a given port and pin. The SIO  
port pins support an additional regulated high output capability,  
as described in Adjustable Output Level.  
0.5 VDDIO  
0.4 VDDIO  
0.5 VREF  
VREF  
6.4.8 Analog Connections  
These connections apply only to GPIO pins. All GPIO pins may  
be used as analog inputs or outputs. The analog voltage present  
on the pin must not exceed the VDDIO supply voltage to which  
the GPIO belongs. Each GPIO may connect to one of the analog  
global busses or to one of the analog mux buses to connect any  
pin to any internal analog resource such as ADC or comparators.  
In addition, select pins provide direct connections to specific  
analog features such as the high current DACs or uncommitted  
opamps.  
Typically a voltage DAC (VDAC) generates the VREF reference.  
“DAC” section on page 59 has more details on VDAC use and  
reference routing to the SIO pins.  
Note  
14. GPIOs with opamp outputs are not recommended for use with CapSense.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 38 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 6-11. SIO Reference for Input and Output  
There are no current limitations for the SIO pins as they present a  
high impedance load to the external circuit where VDDIO < VIN  
<
Input Path  
5.5 V.  
TheGPIOpinsmustbelimitedto100µAusingacurrentlimiting  
resistor. GPIO pins clamp the pin voltage to approximately one  
diode above the VDDIO supply where VDDIO < VIN < VDDA.  
In case of a GPIO pin configured for analog input/output, the  
analog voltage on the pin must not exceed the VDDIO supply  
voltage to which the GPIO belongs.  
Digital  
Input  
Vinref  
A common application for this feature is connection to a bus such  
as I2C where different devices are running from different supply  
voltages. In the I2C case, the PSoC chip is configured into the  
Open Drain, Drives Low mode for the SIO pin. This allows an  
external pull-up to pull the I2C bus voltage above the PSoC pin  
supply. For example, the PSoC chip could operate at 1.8 V, and  
an external device could run from 5 V. Note that the SIO pin’s VIH  
and VIL levels are determined by the associated VDDIO supply  
pin. The SIO pin must be in one of the following modes: 0 (high  
impedance analog), 1 (high impedance digital), or 4 (open drain  
drives low). See Figure 6-10 for details. Absolute maximum  
ratings for the device must be observed for all I/O pins.  
Reference  
Generator  
SIO_Ref  
PIN  
Voutref  
Output Path  
Driver  
Vhigh  
6.4.16 Reset Configuration  
Digital  
Output  
Drive  
Logic  
While reset is active all I/Os are reset to and held in the High  
Impedance Analog state. After reset is released, the state can be  
reprogrammed on a port-by-port basis to pull-down or pull-up. To  
ensure correct reset operation, the port reset configuration data  
is stored in special nonvolatile registers. The stored reset data is  
automatically transferred to the port reset configuration registers  
at reset release.  
6.4.13 SIO as Comparator  
6.4.17 Low-Power Functionality  
This section applies only to SIO pins. The adjustable input level  
feature of the SIOs as explained in the Adjustable Input Level  
section can be used to construct a comparator. The threshold for  
the comparator is provided by the SIO's reference generator. The  
reference generator has the option to set the analog signal  
routed through the analog global line as threshold for the  
comparator. Note that a pair of SIO pins share the same  
threshold. The digital input path in Figure 6-8 on page 35  
illustrates this functionality. In the figure, ‘Reference level’ is the  
analog signal routed through the analog global. The hysteresis  
feature can also be enabled for the input buffer of the SIO, which  
increases noise immunity for the comparator.  
In all low-power modes the I/O pins retain their state until the part  
is awakened and changed or reset. To awaken the part, use a  
pin interrupt, because the port interrupt logic continues to  
function in all low-power modes.  
6.4.18 Special Pin Functionality  
Some pins on the device include additional special functionality  
in addition to their GPIO or SIO functionality. The specific special  
function pins are listed in Pinouts on page 5. The special features  
are:  
Digital  
4- to 25-MHz crystal oscillator  
32.768-kHz crystal oscillator  
6.4.14 Hot Swap  
Wake from sleep on I2C address match. Any pin can be used  
This section applies only to SIO pins. SIO pins support ‘hot swap’  
capability to plug into an application without loading the signals  
that are connected to the SIO pins even when no power is  
applied to the PSoC device. This allows the unpowered PSoC to  
maintain a high impedance load to the external device while also  
preventing the PSoC from being powered through a SIO pin’s  
protection diode.  
for I2C if wake from sleep is not required.  
JTAG interface pins  
SWD interface pins  
SWV interface pins  
External reset  
Analog  
Powering the device up or down while connected to an  
operational I2C bus may cause transient states on the SIO pins.  
The overall I2C bus design should take this into account.  
Opamp inputs and outputs  
High current IDAC outputs  
External reference inputs  
6.4.15 Over Voltage Tolerance  
6.4.19 JTAG Boundary Scan  
All I/O pins provide an over voltage tolerance feature at any  
The device supports standard JTAG boundary scan chains on all  
I/O pins for board level test.  
operating VDD  
.
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 39 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.1 Example Peripherals  
7. Digital Subsystem  
The flexibility of the CY8C36 family’s UDBs and analog blocks  
allow the user to create a wide range of components  
(peripherals). The most common peripherals were built and  
characterized by Cypress and are shown in the PSoC Creator  
component catalog, however, users may also create their own  
custom components using PSoC Creator. Using PSoC Creator,  
users may also create their own components for reuse within  
their organization, for example sensor interfaces, proprietary  
algorithms, and display interfaces.  
The digital programmable system creates application specific  
combinations of both standard and advanced digital peripherals  
and custom logic functions. These peripherals and logic are then  
interconnected to each other and to any pin on the device,  
providing a high level of design flexibility and IP security.  
The features of the digital programmable system are outlined  
here to provide an overview of capabilities and architecture. You  
do not need to interact directly with the programmable digital  
system at the hardware and register level. PSoC Creator  
provides a high level schematic capture graphical interface to  
automatically place and route resources similar to PLDs.  
The number of components available through PSoC Creator is  
too numerous to list in the data sheet, and the list is always  
growing. An example of a component available for use in  
CY8C36 family, but, not explicitly called out in this data sheet is  
the UART component.  
The main components of the digital programmable system are:  
UDB – These form the core functionality of the digital  
programmable system. UDBs are a collection of uncommitted  
logic (PLD) and structural logic (Datapath) optimized to create  
all common embedded peripherals and customized  
functionality that are application or design specific.  
7.1.1 Example Digital Components  
The following is a sample of the digital components available in  
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of  
hardware resources (UDBs, routing, RAM, flash) used by a  
component varies with the features selected in PSoC Creator for  
the component.  
Universal digital block array – UDB blocks are arrayed within  
a matrix of programmable interconnect. The UDB array  
structure is homogeneous and allows for flexible mapping of  
digital functions onto the array. The array supports extensive  
and flexible routing interconnects between UDBs and the  
Digital System Interconnect.  
Communications  
I2C  
UART  
SPI  
Digital system interconnect (DSI) – Digital signals from UDBs,  
fixed function peripherals, I/O pins, interrupts, DMA, and other  
system core signals are attached to the digital system  
interconnecttoimplementfullfeatureddeviceconnectivity. The  
DSI allows any digital function to any pin or other feature  
routability when used with the universal digital block array.  
Functions  
EMIF  
PWMs  
Timers  
Counters  
Figure 7-1. CY8C36 Digital Programmable Architecture  
Logic  
NOT  
OR  
Digital Core System  
and Fixed Function Peripherals  
XOR  
AND  
DSI Routing Interface  
7.1.2 Example Analog Components  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
The following is a sample of the analog components available in  
PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact amount of  
hardware resources (SC/CT blocks, routing, RAM, flash) used  
by a component varies with the features selected in PSoC  
Creator for the component.  
Amplifiers  
TIA  
PGA  
DSI Routing Interface  
opamp  
ADC  
Digital Core System  
Delta-sigma  
and Fixed Function Peripherals  
DACs  
Current  
Voltage  
PWM  
Comparators  
Mixers  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 40 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.1.3 Example System Function Components  
7.1.4.2 Component Catalog  
The following is a sample of the system function components  
available in PSoC Creator for the CY8C36 family. The exact  
amount of hardware resources (UDBs, DFB taps, SC/CT blocks,  
routing, RAM, flash) used by a component varies with the  
features selected in PSoC Creator for the component.  
The component catalog is a repository of reusable design  
elements that select device functionality and customize your  
PSoC device. It is populated with an impressive selection of  
content; from simple primitives such as logic gates and device  
registers, through the digital timers, counters and PWMs, plus  
analog components such as ADC, DACs, and filters, and  
communication protocols, such as I2C, USB, and CAN. See  
Example Peripherals on page 40 for more details about available  
peripherals. All content is fully characterized and carefully  
documented in data sheets with code examples, AC/DC  
specifications, and user code ready APIs.  
CapSense  
LCD drive  
LCD control  
Filters  
7.1.4.3 Design Reuse  
7.1.4 Designing with PSoC Creator  
7.1.4.1 More Than a Typical IDE  
The symbol editor gives you the ability to develop reusable  
components that can significantly reduce future design time. Just  
draw a symbol and associate that symbol with your proven  
design. PSoC Creator allows for the placement of the new  
symbol anywhere in the component catalog along with the  
content provided by Cypress. You can then reuse your content  
as many times as you want, and in any number of projects,  
without ever having to revisit the details of the implementation.  
A successful design tool allows for the rapid development and  
deployment of both simple and complex designs. It reduces or  
eliminates any learning curve. It makes the integration of a new  
design into the production stream straightforward.  
PSoC Creator is that design tool.  
PSoC Creator is a full featured Integrated Development  
Environment (IDE) for hardware and software design. It is  
optimized specifically for PSoC devices and combines a modern,  
powerful software development platform with a sophisticated  
graphical design tool. This unique combination of tools makes  
PSoC Creator the most flexible embedded design platform  
available.  
7.1.4.4 Software Development  
Anchoring the tool is a modern, highly customizable user  
interface. It includes project management and integrated editors  
for C and assembler source code, as well the design entry tools.  
Project build control leverages compiler technology from top  
commercial vendors such as ARM® Limited, Keil™, and  
CodeSourcery (GNU). Free versions of Keil C51 and GNU C  
Compiler (GCC) for ARM, with no restrictions on code size or end  
product distribution, are included with the tool distribution.  
Upgrading to more optimizing compilers is a snap with support  
for the professional Keil C51 product and ARM RealView™  
compiler.  
Graphical design entry simplifies the task of configuring a  
particular part. You can select the required functionality from an  
extensive catalog of components and place it in your design. All  
components are parameterized and have an editor dialog that  
allows you to tailor functionality to your needs.  
PSoC Creator automatically configures clocks and routes the I/O  
to the selected pins and then generates APIs to give the  
application complete control over the hardware. Changing the  
PSoC device configuration is as simple as adding a new  
component, setting its parameters, and rebuilding the project.  
7.1.4.5 Nonintrusive Debugging  
With JTAG (4-wire) and SWD (2-wire) debug connectivity  
available on all devices, the PSoC Creator debugger offers full  
control over the target device with minimum intrusion.  
Breakpoints and code execution commands are all readily  
available from toolbar buttons and an impressive lineup of  
windows—register, locals, watch, call stack, memory and  
peripherals—make for an unparalleled level of visibility into the  
system.  
At any stage of development you are free to change the  
hardware configuration and even the target processor. To  
retarget your application (hardware and software) to new  
devices, even from 8- to 32-bit families, just select the new  
device and rebuild.  
You also have the ability to change the C compiler and evaluate  
an alternative. Components are designed for portability and are  
validated against all devices, from all families, and against all  
supported tool chains. Switching compilers is as easy as editing  
the from the project options and rebuilding the application with  
no errors from the generated APIs or boot code.  
PSoC Creator contains all the tools necessary to complete a  
design, and then to maintain and extend that design for years to  
come. All steps of the design flow are carefully integrated and  
optimized for ease-of-use and to maximize productivity.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 41 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Status and control module – The primary role of this block is to  
provide a way for CPU firmware to interact and synchronize  
with UDB operation.  
7.2 Universal Digital Block  
The UDB represents an evolutionary step to the next generation  
of PSoC embedded digital peripheral functionality. The  
architecture in first generation PSoC digital blocks provides  
coarse programmability in which a few fixed functions with a  
small number of options are available. The new UDB  
architecture is the optimal balance between configuration  
granularity and efficient implementation. A cornerstone of this  
approach is to provide the ability to customize the devices digital  
operation to match application requirements.  
Clock and reset module – This block provides the UDB clocks  
and reset selection and control.  
7.2.1 PLD Module  
The primary purpose of the PLD blocks is to implement logic  
expressions, state machines, sequencers, lookup tables, and  
decoders. In the simplest use model, consider the PLD blocks as  
a standalone resource onto which general purpose RTL is  
synthesized and mapped. The more common and efficient use  
model is to create digital functions from a combination of PLD  
and datapath blocks, where the PLD implements only the  
random logic and state portion of the function while the datapath  
(ALU) implements the more structured elements.  
To achieve this, UDBs consist of a combination of uncommitted  
logic (PLD), structured logic (Datapath), and a flexible routing  
scheme to provide interconnect between these elements, I/O  
connections, and other peripherals. UDB functionality ranges  
from simple self contained functions that are implemented in one  
UDB, or even a portion of a UDB (unused resources are  
available for other functions), to more complex functions that  
require multiple UDBs. Examples of basic functions are timers,  
counters, CRC generators, PWMs, dead band generators, and  
communications functions, such as UARTs, SPI, and I2C. Also,  
the PLD blocks and connectivity provide full featured general  
purpose programmable logic within the limits of the available  
resources.  
Figure 7-3. PLD 12C4 Structure  
IN0  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
IN6  
IN7  
IN8  
IN9  
IN10  
IN11  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
T C T C T C T C T C T C T C T C  
Figure 7-2. UDB Block Diagram  
AND  
Array  
PLD  
Chaining  
PLD  
12C4  
(8 PTs)  
PLD  
12C4  
(8 PTs)  
Clock  
and Reset  
Control  
Carry In  
Status and  
Control  
Datapath  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
MC0  
MC1  
MC2  
MC3  
OUT0  
OUT1  
OUT2  
OUT3  
Datapath  
Chaining  
Carry Out  
OR  
Array  
Routing Channel  
One 12C4 PLD block is shown in Figure 7-3. This PLD has 12  
inputs, which feed across eight product terms. Each product term  
(AND function) can be from 1 to 12 inputs wide, and in a given  
product term, the true (T) or complement (C) of each input can  
be selected. The product terms are summed (OR function) to  
create the PLD outputs. A sum can be from 1 to 8 product terms  
wide. The 'C' in 12C4 indicates that the width of the OR gate (in  
this case 8) is constant across all outputs (rather than variable  
as in a 22V10 device). This PLA like structure gives maximum  
flexibility and insures that all inputs and outputs are permutable  
for ease of allocation by the software tools. There are two 12C4  
PLDs in each UDB.  
The main component blocks of the UDB are:  
PLD blocks – There are two small PLDs per UDB. Theseblocks  
take inputs from the routing array and form registered or  
combinational sum-of-products logic. PLDs are used to  
implement state machines, state bits, and combinational logic  
equations. PLD configuration is automatically generated from  
graphical primitives.  
DatapathmoduleThis8-bitwidedatapathcontainsstructured  
logic to implement a dynamically configurable ALU, a variety  
ofcompare configurations andconditiongeneration. Thisblock  
alsocontainsinput/outputFIFOs, whicharetheprimaryparallel  
data interface between the CPU/DMA system and the UDB.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 42 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.2.2 Datapath Module  
The datapath contains an 8-bit single cycle ALU, with associated compare and condition generation logic. This datapath block is  
optimized to implement embedded functions, such as timers, counters, integrators, PWMs, PRS, CRC, shifters and dead band  
generators and many others.  
Figure 7-4. Datapath Top Level  
PHUB System Bus  
R/W Access to All  
Registers  
F1  
FIFOs  
Output  
Muxes  
Input  
Muxes  
F0  
A0  
A1  
D0  
D1  
Input from  
Programmable  
Routing  
Output to  
Programmable  
Routing  
6
6
D1  
Data Registers  
D0  
To/From  
Previous  
Datapath  
To/From  
Next  
Datapath  
Chaining  
A1  
Accumulators  
A0  
PI  
Parallel Input/Output  
(to/from Programmable Routing)  
PO  
ALU  
Shift  
Mask  
7.2.2.1 Working Registers  
7.2.2.2 Dynamic Datapath Configuration RAM  
The datapath contains six primary working registers, which are  
accessed by CPU firmware or DMA during normal operation.  
Dynamic configuration is the ability to change the datapath  
function and internal configuration on a cycle-by-cycle basis,  
under sequencer control. This is implemented using the 8-word  
× 16-bit configuration RAM, which stores eight unique 16-bit  
wide configurations. The address input to this RAM controls the  
sequence, and can be routed from any block connected to the  
UDB routing matrix, most typically PLD logic, I/O pins, or from  
the outputs of this or other datapath blocks.  
Table 7-1. Working Datapath Registers  
Name  
Function  
Description  
A0 and A1 Accumulators  
These are sources and sinks for  
the ALU and also sources for the  
compares.  
ALU  
D0 and D1 Data Registers These are sources for the ALU  
and sources for the compares.  
The ALU performs eight general purpose functions. They are:  
F0 and F1 FIFOs  
These are the primary interface  
to the system bus. They can be a  
data source for the data registers  
and accumulators or they can  
capture data from the  
Increment  
Decrement  
Add  
Subtract  
Logical AND  
Logical OR  
Logical XOR  
accumulatorsorALU. EachFIFO  
is four bytes deep.  
Pass, used to pass a value through the ALU to the shift register,  
mask, or another UDB register.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 43 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Independent of the ALU operation, these functions are available:  
7.2.2.7 Chaining  
The datapath can be configured to chain conditions and signals  
such as carries and shift data with neighboring datapaths to  
create higher precision arithmetic, shift, CRC/PRS functions.  
Shift left  
Shift right  
Nibble swap  
Bitwise OR mask  
7.2.2.8 Time Multiplexing  
In applications that are over sampled, or do not need high clock  
rates, the single ALU block in the datapath can be efficiently  
shared with two sets of registers and condition generators. Carry  
and shift out data from the ALU are registered and can be  
selected as inputs in subsequent cycles. This provides support  
for 16-bit functions in one (8-bit) datapath.  
7.2.2.3 Conditionals  
Each datapath has two compares, with bit masking options.  
Compare operands include the two accumulators and the two  
data registers in a variety of configurations. Other conditions  
include zero detect, all ones detect, and overflow. These  
conditions are the primary datapath outputs, a selection of which  
can be driven out to the UDB routing matrix. Conditional  
computation can use the built in chaining to neighboring UDBs  
to operate on wider data widths without the need to use routing  
resources.  
7.2.2.9 Datapath I/O  
There are six inputs and six outputs that connect the datapath to  
the routing matrix. Inputs from the routing provide the  
configuration for the datapath operation to perform in each cycle,  
and the serial data inputs. Inputs can be routed from other UDB  
blocks, other device peripherals, device I/O pins, and so on. The  
outputs to the routing can be selected from the generated  
conditions, and the serial data outputs. Outputs can be routed to  
other UDB blocks, device peripherals, interrupt and DMA  
controller, I/O pins, and so on.  
7.2.2.4 Variable MSB  
The most significant bit of an arithmetic and shift function can be  
programmatically specified. This supports variable width CRC  
and PRS functions, and in conjunction with ALU output masking,  
can implement arbitrary width timers, counters and shift blocks.  
7.2.3 Status and Control Module  
7.2.2.5 Built in CRC/PRS  
The primary purpose of this circuitry is to coordinate CPU  
firmware interaction with internal UDB operation.  
The datapath has built-in support for single cycle CRC  
computation and PRS generation of arbitrary width and arbitrary  
polynomial. CRC/PRS functions longer than 8 bits may be  
implemented in conjunction with PLD logic, or built in chaining  
may be use to extend the function into neighboring UDBs.  
Figure 7-6. Status and Control Registers  
System Bus  
7.2.2.6 Input/Output FIFOs  
8-bit Status Register  
(Read Only)  
8-bit Control Register  
(Write/Read)  
Each datapath contains two four-byte deep FIFOs, which can be  
independently configured as an input buffer (system bus writes  
to the FIFO, datapath internal reads the FIFO), or an output  
buffer (datapath internal writes to the FIFO, the system bus reads  
from the FIFO). The FIFOs generate status that are selectable  
as datapath outputs and can therefore be driven to the routing,  
to interact with sequencers, interrupts, or DMA.  
Routing Channel  
The bits of the control register, which may be written to by the  
system bus, are used to drive into the routing matrix, and thus  
provide firmware with the opportunity to control the state of UDB  
processing. The status register is read-only and it allows internal  
UDB state to be read out onto the system bus directly from  
internal routing. This allows firmware to monitor the state of UDB  
processing. Each bit of these registers has programmable  
connections to the routing matrix and routing connections are  
made depending on the requirements of the application.  
Figure 7-5. Example FIFO Configurations  
System Bus  
System Bus  
F0  
F0  
F1  
D0/D1  
D0  
A0  
D1  
A1  
A0/A1/ALU  
A0/A1/ALU  
F0  
A0/A1/ALU  
F1  
7.2.3.1 Usage Examples  
As an example of control input, a bit in the control register can  
be allocated as a function enable bit. There are multiple ways to  
enable a function. In one method the control bit output would be  
routed to the clock control block in one or more UDBs and serve  
as a clock enable for the selected UDB blocks. A status example  
is a case where a PLD or datapath block generated a condition,  
such as a “compare true” condition that is captured and latched  
by the status register and then read (and cleared) by CPU  
firmware.  
F1  
System Bus  
System Bus  
Dual Capture  
TX/RX  
Dual Buffer  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 44 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.2.3.2 Clock Generation  
An example of this is the 8-bit timer in the upper left corner of the  
array. This function only requires one datapath in the UDB, and  
therefore the PLD resources may be allocated to another  
function. A function such as a Quadrature Decoder may require  
more PLD logic than one UDB can supply and in this case can  
utilize the unused PLD blocks in the 8-bit Timer UDB.  
Programmable resources in the UDB array are generally  
homogeneous so functions can be mapped to arbitrary  
boundaries in the array.  
Each subcomponent block of a UDB including the two PLDs, the  
datapath, and Status and Control, has a clock selection and  
control block. This promotes a fine granularity with respect to  
allocating clocking resources to UDB component blocks and  
allows unused UDB resources to be used by other functions for  
maximum system efficiency.  
7.3 UDB Array Description  
Figure 7-8. Function Mapping Example in a Bank of UDBs  
Figure 7-7 shows an example of a 16 UDB array. In addition to  
the array core, there are a DSI routing interfaces at the top and  
bottom of the array. Other interfaces that are not explicitly shown  
include the system interfaces for bus and clock distribution. The  
UDB array includes multiple horizontal and vertical routing  
channels each comprised of 96 wires. The wire connections to  
UDBs, at horizontal/vertical intersection and at the DSI interface  
are highly permutable providing efficient automatic routing in  
PSoC Creator. Additionally the routing allows wire by wire  
segmentation along the vertical and horizontal routing to further  
increase routing flexibility and capability.  
8-Bit  
Timer  
16-Bit  
PWM  
Quadrature Decoder  
16-Bit PYRS  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
UDB  
8-Bit  
UDB  
8-Bit SPI  
UDB  
UDB  
Figure 7-7. Digital System Interface Structure  
Timer  
Logic  
I2C Slave  
UDB  
12-Bit SPI  
UDB  
System Connections  
UDB  
UDB  
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
Logic  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UART  
12-Bit PWM  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
7.4 DSI Routing Interface Description  
The DSI routing interface is a continuation of the horizontal and  
vertical routing channels at the top and bottom of the UDB array  
core. It provides general purpose programmable routing  
between device peripherals, including UDBs, I/Os, analog  
peripherals, interrupts, DMA and fixed function peripherals.  
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
UDB  
Figure 7-9 illustrates the concept of the digital system  
interconnect, which connects the UDB array routing matrix with  
other device peripherals. Any digital core or fixed function  
peripheral that needs programmable routing is connected to this  
interface.  
HV  
A
HV  
B
HV  
A
HV  
B
Signals in this category include:  
System Connections  
Interrupt requests from all digital peripherals in the system.  
DMA requests from all digital peripherals in the system.  
Digital peripheral data signals that need flexible routing to I/Os.  
Digital peripheral data signals that need connections to UDBs.  
Connections to the interrupt and DMA controllers.  
Connection to I/O pins.  
7.3.1 UDB Array Programmable Resources  
Figure 7-8 shows an example of how functions are mapped into  
a bank of 16 UDBs. The primary programmable resources of the  
UDB are two PLDs, one datapath and one status/control register.  
These resources are allocated independently, because they  
have independently selectable clocks, and therefore unused  
blocks are allocated to other unrelated functions.  
Connection to analog system digital signals.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 45 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 7-9. Digital System Interconnect  
single synchronized (pipelined) and a data input signal has the  
option to be double synchronized. The synchronization clock is  
the master clock (see Figure 6-1). Normally all inputs from pins  
are synchronized as this is required if the CPU interacts with the  
signal or any signal derived from it. Asynchronous inputs have  
rare uses. An example of this is a feed through of combinational  
PLD logic from input pins to output pins.  
Timer  
Interrupt  
DMA  
IO Port  
Pins  
Global  
Clocks  
CAN  
I2C  
Counters  
Controller  
Controller  
Figure 7-11. I/O Pin Synchronization Routing  
Digital System Routing I/F  
UDB ARRAY  
DO  
DI  
Digital System Routing I/F  
Figure 7-12. I/O Pin Output Connectivity  
8 IO Data Output Connections from the  
UDB Array Digital System Interface  
Global  
Clocks  
IO Port  
Pins  
SC/CT  
Blocks  
EMIF  
Del-Sig  
DACs  
Comparators  
Interrupt and DMA routing is very flexible in the CY8C36  
programmable architecture. In addition to the numerous fixed  
function peripherals that can generate interrupt requests, any  
data signal in the UDB array routing can also be used to generate  
a request. A single peripheral may generate multiple  
independent interrupt requests simplifying system and firmware  
design. Figure 7-10 shows the structure of the IDMUX  
(Interrupt/DMA Multiplexer).  
DO  
PIN 0  
DO  
PIN1  
DO  
PIN2  
DO  
PIN3  
DO  
DO  
PIN5  
DO  
PIN6  
DO  
PIN7  
PIN4  
Port i  
Figure 7-10. Interrupt and DMA Processing in the IDMUX  
Interrupt and DMA Processing in IDMUX  
There are four more DSI connections to a given I/O port to  
implement dynamic output enable control of pins. This  
connectivity gives a range of options, from fully ganged 8-bits  
controlled by one signal, to up to four individually controlled pins.  
The output enable signal is useful for creating tri-state  
bidirectional pins and buses.  
Fixed Function IRQs  
0
1
Interrupt  
Controller  
IRQs  
2
UDB Array  
Figure 7-13. I/O Pin Output Enable Connectivity  
Edge  
3
Detect  
4 IO Control Signal Connections from  
UDB Array Digital System Interface  
DRQs  
DMA termout (IRQs)  
0
Fixed Function DRQs  
DMA  
Controller  
1
Edge  
2
Detect  
7.4.1 I/O Port Routing  
There are a total of 20 DSI routes to a typical 8-bit I/O port, 16  
for data and four for drive strength control.  
OE  
PIN 0  
OE  
PIN1  
OE  
PIN2  
OE  
PIN3  
OE  
PIN4  
OE  
PIN5  
OE  
PIN6  
OE  
PIN7  
When an I/O pin is connected to the routing, there are two  
primary connections available, an input and an output. In  
conjunction with drive strength control, this can implement a  
bidirectional I/O pin. A data output signal has the option to be  
Port i  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 46 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.5 CAN  
The CAN peripheral is a fully functional controller area network (CAN) supporting communication baud rates up to 1 Mbps. The CAN  
controller implements the CAN2.0A and CAN2.0B specifications as defined in the Bosch specification and conforms to the  
ISO-11898-1 standard. The CAN protocol was originally designed for automotive applications with a focus on a high level of fault  
detection. This ensures high communication reliability at a low cost. Because of its success in automotive applications, CAN is used  
as a standard communication protocol for motion oriented machine control networks (CANOpen) and factory automation applications  
(DeviceNet). The CAN controller features allow the efficient implementation of higher level protocols without affecting the performance  
of the microcontroller CPU. Full configuration support is provided in PSoC Creator.  
Figure 7-14. CAN Bus System Implementation  
CAN Node 1  
PSoC  
CAN Node 2  
CAN Node n  
CAN  
Drivers  
CAN Controller  
En  
Tx Rx  
CAN Transceiver  
CAN_H  
CAN_H  
CAN_L  
CAN_H  
CAN_L  
CAN_L  
CAN Bus  
7.5.1 CAN Features  
Receive path  
16 receive buffers each with its own message filter  
Enhanced hardware message filter implementation that  
covers the ID, IDE, and RTR  
DeviceNet addressing support  
Multiple receive buffers linkable to build a larger receive  
message array  
CAN2.0A/B protocol implementation – ISO 11898 compliant  
Standard and extended frames with up to 8 bytes of data per  
frame  
Message filter capabilities  
Remote Transmission Request (RTR) support  
Programmable bit rate up to 1 Mbps  
Automatic transmission request (RTR) response handler  
Lost received message notification  
Listen Only mode  
Transmit path  
SW readable error counter and indicator  
Eight transmit buffers  
Programmable transmit priority  
Round robin  
Fixed priority  
Message transmissions abort capability  
Sleep mode: Wake the device from sleep with activity on the  
Rx pin  
Supports two or three wire interface to external transceiver (Tx,  
Rx, and Enable). The three-wire interface is compatible with  
the Philips PHY; the PHY is not included on-chip. The three  
wires can be routed to any I/O  
7.5.2 Software Tools Support  
CAN Controller configuration integrated into PSoC Creator:  
Enhanced interrupt controller  
CAN receive and transmit buffers status  
CAN controller error status including BusOff  
CAN Configuration walkthrough with bit timing analyzer  
Receive filter setup  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 47 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 7-15. CAN Controller Block Diagram  
TxMessage0  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
TxMessage1  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
Tx Buffer  
Status  
TxReq  
Bit Timing  
Pending  
Priority  
Arbiter  
Tx  
TxMessage6  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
Tx  
CAN  
Framer  
CRC  
Generator  
TxInterrupt  
Request  
(if enabled)  
TxMessage7  
TxReq  
TxAbort  
Error Status  
Error Active  
Error Passive  
Bus Off  
RTR RxMessages  
0-15  
Tx Error Counter  
Rx Error Counter  
RxMessage0  
RxMessage1  
Acceptance Code 0  
Acceptance Mask 0  
Acceptance Mask 1  
Rx Buffer  
Status  
RxMessage  
Available  
Acceptance Code 1  
Rx  
Rx  
RxMessage  
Handler  
CAN  
Framer  
CRC Check  
RxMessage14  
RxMessage15  
Acceptance Mask 14  
Acceptance Mask 15  
Acceptance Code 14  
Acceptance Code 15  
RxInterrupt  
Request  
(if enabled)  
WakeUp  
Request  
Error Detection  
CRC  
Form  
ACK  
Bit Stuffing  
Bit Error  
Overload  
Arbitration  
ErrInterrupt  
Request  
(if enabled)  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 48 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
7.6 USB  
7.7 Timers, Counters, and PWMs  
PSoC includes a dedicated Full-Speed (12 Mbps) USB 2.0  
transceiver supporting all four USB transfer types: control,  
interrupt, bulk, and isochronous. PSoC Creator provides full  
configuration support. USB interfaces to hosts through two  
dedicated USBIO pins, which are detailed in the “I/O System and  
Routing” section on page 33.  
The timer/counter/PWM peripheral is a 16-bit dedicated  
peripheral providing three of the most common embedded  
peripheral features. As almost all embedded systems use some  
combination of timers, counters, and PWMs. Four of them have  
been included on this PSoC device family. Additional and more  
advanced functionality timers, counters, and PWMs can also be  
instantiated in UDBs as required. PSoC Creator allows you to  
choose the timer, counter, and PWM features that they require.  
The tool set utilizes the most optimal resources available.  
USB includes the following features:  
Eight unidirectional data endpoints  
The timer/counter/PWM peripheral can select from multiple clock  
sources, with input and output signals connected through the  
DSI routing. DSI routing allows input and output connections to  
any device pin and any internal digital signal accessible through  
the DSI. Each of the four instances has a compare output,  
terminal count output (optional complementary compare output),  
and programmable interrupt request line. The  
Timer/Counter/PWMs are configurable as free running, one shot,  
or Enable input controlled. The peripheral has timer reset and  
capture inputs, and a kill input for control of the comparator  
outputs. The peripheral supports full 16-bit capture.  
One bidirectional control endpoint 0 (EP0)  
Shared 512-byte buffer for the eight data endpoints  
Dedicated 8-byte buffer for EP0  
Three memory modes  
Manual memory management with no DMA access  
Manual memory management with manual DMA access  
Automatic memory management with automatic DMA  
access  
Internal 3.3-V regulator for transceiver  
Timer/Counter/PWM features include:  
16-bit Timer/Counter/PWM (down count only)  
Selectable clock source  
Internal 48-MHz main oscillator mode that auto locks to USB  
bus clock, requiring no external crystal for USB (USB equipped  
parts only)  
PWM comparator (configurable for LT, LTE, EQ, GTE, GT)  
Period reload on start, reset, and terminal count  
Interrupt on terminal count, compare true, or capture  
Dynamic counter reads  
Interrupts on bus and each endpoint event, with device wakeup  
USB reset, suspend, and resume operations  
Bus-powered and self-powered modes  
Figure 7-16. USB  
Timer capture mode  
Count while enable signal is asserted mode  
Free run mode  
512 X 8  
Arbiter  
One Shot mode (stop at end of period)  
Complementary PWM outputs with deadband  
PWM output kill  
SRAM  
External 22  
D+  
Resistors  
S I E  
(Serial Interface  
Engine)  
USB  
I/O  
Figure 7-17. Timer/Counter/PWM  
D–  
Interrupts  
Clock  
IRQ  
Reset  
Timer / Counter /  
PWM 16-bit  
48 MHz  
IMO  
TC / Compare!  
Compare  
Enable  
Capture  
Kill  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 49 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
functionality is required, I2C pin connections are limited to the  
two special sets of SIO pins.  
I2C features include:  
2
7.8 I C  
The I2C peripheral provides a synchronous two wire interface  
designed to interface the PSoC device with a two wire I2C serial  
communication bus. It is compatible[15] with I2C Standard-mode,  
Fast-mode, and Fast-mode Plus devices as defined in the NXP  
I2C-bus specification and user manual (UM10204). The I2C bus  
I/O may be implemented with GPIO or SIO in open-drain modes.  
Additional I2C interfaces can be instantiated using Universal  
Digital Blocks (UDBs) in PSoC Creator, as required.  
Slave and master, transmitter, and receiver operation  
Byte processing for low CPU overhead  
Interrupt or polling CPU interface  
Support for bus speeds up to 1 Mbps  
7 or 10-bit addressing (10-bit addressing requires firmware  
To eliminate the need for excessive CPU intervention and  
overhead, I2C specific support is provided for status detection  
and generation of framing bits. I2C operates as a slave, a master,  
or multimaster (Slave and Master).[16]. In slave mode, the unit  
always listens for a start condition to begin sending or receiving  
data. Master mode supplies the ability to generate the Start and  
Stop conditions and initiate transactions. Multimaster mode  
provides clock synchronization and arbitration to allow multiple  
masters on the same bus. If Master mode is enabled and Slave  
mode is not enabled, the block does not generate interrupts on  
externally generated Start conditions. I2C interfaces through DSI  
routing and allows direct connections to any GPIO or SIO pins.  
support)  
SMBus operation (through firmware support - SMBus  
supported in hardware in UDBs)  
7-bit hardware address compare  
Wake from low-power modes on address match  
Glitch filtering (active and alternate-active modes only)  
Data transfers follow the format shown in Figure 7-18. After the  
START condition (S), a slave address is sent. This address is 7  
bits long followed by an eighth bit which is a data direction bit  
(R/W) - a 'zero' indicates a transmission (WRITE), a 'one'  
indicates a request for data (READ). A data transfer is always  
terminated by a STOP condition (P) generated by the master.  
I2C provides hardware address detect of a 7-bit address without  
CPU intervention. Additionally the device can wake from  
low-power modes on a 7-bit hardware address match. If wakeup  
Figure 7-18. I2C Complete Transfer Timing  
SDA  
SCL  
8
9
1 - 7  
8
9
1 - 7  
8
9
1 - 7  
START  
Condition  
STOP  
Condition  
ADDRESS  
R/W  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
DATA  
ACK  
Notes  
15. The I2C peripheral is non-compliant with the NXP I2C specification in the following areas: analog glitch filter, I/O VOL/IOL, I/O hysteresis. The I2C Block has a digital  
glitch filter (not available in sleep mode). The Fast-mode minimum fall-time specification can be met by setting the I/Os to slow speed mode. See the I/O Electrical  
Specifications in “Inputs and Outputs” section on page 74 for details.  
16. Fixed-block I2C does not support undefined bus conditions, nor does it support Repeated Start in Slave mode. These conditions should be avoided, or the UDB-based  
I2C component should be used instead.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 50 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
The typical use model is for data to be supplied to the DFB over  
the system bus from another on-chip system data source such  
as an ADC. The data typically passes through main memory or  
is directly transferred from another chip resource through DMA.  
The DFB processes this data and passes the result to another  
on chip resource such as a DAC or main memory through DMA  
on the system bus.  
7.9 Digital Filter Block  
Some devices in the CY8C36 family of devices have a dedicated  
HW accelerator block used for digital filtering. The DFB has a  
dedicated multiplier and accumulator that calculates a 24-bit by  
24-bit multiply accumulate in one bus clock cycle. This enables  
the mapping of a direct form FIR filter that approaches a  
computation rate of one FIR tap for each clock cycle. The MCU  
can implement any of the functions performed by this block, but  
at a slower rate that consumes MCU bandwidth.  
Data movement in or out of the DFB is typically controlled by the  
system DMA controller but can be moved directly by the MCU.  
The heart of the DFB is a datapath (DP), which is the numerical  
calculation unit of the DFB. The DP is a 24-bit fixed-point  
numerical processor containing a 48-bit multiply and accumulate  
function (MAC), a multi-function ALU, sample and coefficient  
data RAMs as well as data routing, shifting, holding and rounding  
functions.  
8. Analog Subsystem  
The analog programmable system creates application specific  
combinations of both standard and advanced analog signal  
processing blocks. These blocks are then interconnected to  
each other and also to any pin on the device, providing a high  
level of design flexibility and IP security. The features of the  
analog subsystem are outlined here to provide an overview of  
capabilities and architecture.  
In the MAC, two 24-bit values can be multiplied and the result  
added to the 48-bit accumulator in each bus clock cycle. The  
MAC is the only portion of the DP that is wider than 24 bits. All  
results from the MAC are passed on to the ALU as 24-bit values  
representing the high-order 24 bits in the accumulator shifted by  
one (bits 46:23). The MAC assumes an implied binary point after  
the most significant bit.  
Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture provided by  
analog globals, analog mux bus, and analog local buses.  
High resolution delta-sigma ADC.  
The DP also contains an optimized ALU that supports add,  
subtract, comparison, threshold, absolute value, squelch,  
saturation, and other functions. The DP unit is controlled by  
seven control fields totaling 18 bits coming from the DFB  
Controller. For more information see the TRM.  
Up to four 8-bit DACs that provide either voltage or current  
output.  
Fourcomparatorswithoptional connectiontoconfigurableLUT  
outputs.  
The PSoC Creator interface provides a wizard to implement FIR  
and IIR digital filters with coefficients for LPF, BPF, HPF, Notch  
and arbitrary shape filters. 64 pairs of data and coefficients are  
stored. This enables a 64 tap FIR filter or up to 4 16 tap filters of  
either FIR or IIR formulation.  
Up to four configurable switched capacitor/continuous time  
(SC/CT) blocks for functions that include opamp, unity gain  
buffer, programmablegainamplifier, transimpedanceamplifier,  
and mixer.  
Up to four opamps for internal use and connection to GPIO that  
can be used as high current output buffers.  
Figure 7-19. DFB Application Diagram (pwr/gnd not shown)  
CapSense subsystem to enable capacitive touch sensing.  
BUSCLK  
read_data  
write_data  
Precision reference for generating an accurate analog voltage  
for internal analog blocks.  
Data  
Source  
(PHUB)  
System  
Bus  
addr  
Digital  
Routing  
Digital Filter  
Block  
Data  
Dest  
(PHUB)  
DMA  
Request  
DMA  
CTRL  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 51 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 8-1. Analog Subsystem Block Diagram  
DAC  
DAC  
DAC  
DAC  
Precision  
Reference  
A
N
A
L
O
G
A
N
A
L
O
G
SC/CT Block  
SC/CT Block  
SC/CT Block  
GPIO  
Port  
GPIO  
Port  
SC/CT Block  
R
O
U
T
I
R
O
U
T
I
Comparators  
CMP CMP  
N
G
N
G
CMP  
CMP  
CapSense Subsystem  
Config&  
Status  
Registers  
Analog  
Interface  
AHB  
PHUB  
CPU  
DSI  
Array  
Clock  
Distribution  
Decimator  
The PSoC Creator software program provides a user friendly  
interface to configure the analog connections between the GPIO  
and various analog resources and connections from one analog  
resource to another. PSoC Creator also provides component  
libraries that allow you to configure the various analog blocks to  
perform application specific functions (PGA, transimpedance  
amplifier, voltage DAC, current DAC, and so on). The tool also  
generates API interface libraries that allow you to write firmware  
that allows the communication between the analog peripheral  
and CPU/Memory.  
8.1.1 Features  
Flexible, configurable analog routing architecture  
16 analog globals (AG) and two analog mux buses  
(AMUXBUS) to connect GPIOs and the analog blocks  
Each GPIO is connected to one analog global and one analog  
mux bus  
Eight analog local buses (abus) to route signals between the  
different analog blocks  
8.1 Analog Routing  
Multiplexers and switches for input and output selection of the  
analog blocks  
The CY8C36 family of devices has a flexible analog routing  
architecture that provides the capability to connect GPIOs and  
different analog blocks, and also route signals between different  
analog blocks. One of the strong points of this flexible routing  
architecture is that it allows dynamic routing of input and output  
connections to the different analog blocks.  
8.1.2 Functional Description  
Analog globals (AGs) and analog mux buses (AMUXBUS)  
provide analog connectivity between GPIOs and the various  
analog blocks. There are 16 AGs in the CY8C36 family. The  
analog routing architecture is divided into four quadrants as  
shown in Figure 8-2. Each quadrant has four analog globals  
(AGL[0..3], AGL[4..7], AGR[0..3], AGR[4..7]). Each GPIO is  
connected to the corresponding AG through an analog switch.  
The analog mux bus is a shared routing resource that connects  
to every GPIO through an analog switch. There are two  
AMUXBUS routes in CY8C36, one in the left half (AMUXBUSL)  
and one in the right half (AMUXBUSR), as shown in Figure 8-2  
on page 53.  
For information on how to make pin selections for optimal analog  
routing, refer to the application note, AN58304 - PSoC® 3 and  
PSoC® 5 - Pin Selection for Analog Designs.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 52 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 8-2. CY8C36 Analog Interconnect  
*
*
*
*
*
swinp  
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
swinn  
*
*
AMUXBUSR  
AMUXBUSL  
AGL[4]  
AGR[4]  
AGR[5]  
AGR[6]  
AGR[7]  
AGL[5]  
AGL[6]  
AGL[7]  
ExVrefL  
ExVrefL1  
ExVrefL2  
swinp  
swinn  
GPIO  
P3[5]  
GPIO  
P3[4]  
GPIO  
P3[3]  
GPIO  
P3[2]  
GPIO  
P3[1]  
GPIO  
P3[0]  
GPXT  
opamp3  
swfol  
opamp1  
swfol  
opamp0  
swfol  
opamp2  
swfol  
swinp  
swinn  
0123  
3210  
01234567  
76543210  
GPIO  
P0[4]  
GPIO  
P0[5]  
GPIO  
P0[6]  
GPIO  
swinp  
swinn  
LPF  
swout  
swout  
in0  
in1  
abuf_vref_int  
(1.024V)  
abuf_vref_int  
(1.024V)  
i0  
i2  
*
ExVrefR  
swin  
swin  
out0  
out1  
comp0  
comp1  
*
+
-
+
-
P0[7]  
i3  
i1  
COMPARATOR  
cmp0_vref  
(1.024V)  
cmp0_vref  
(1.024V)  
+
-
+
-
GPIO  
P4[2]  
GPIO  
P4[3]  
GPIO  
cmp_muxvn[1:0]  
vref_cmp1  
comp2  
comp3  
cmp1_vref  
(0.256V)  
*
bg_vda_res_en  
P15[1]  
GPXT  
P15[0]  
bg_vda_swabusl0  
Vdda  
Vdda/2  
out  
ref  
in  
out  
ref  
in  
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)  
CAPSENSE  
refbufl  
refbuf_vref1 (1.024V)  
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)  
*
refbuf_vref2 (1.2V)  
refbufr  
refsel[1:0]  
refsel[1:0]  
P4[4]  
GPIO  
P4[5]  
GPIO  
P4[6]  
GPIO  
P4[7]  
vssa  
Vssa  
sc0  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc1  
Vin  
Vref  
sc1_bgref  
(1.024V)  
sc0_bgref  
(1.024V)  
*
out  
sc2_bgref  
(1.024V)  
sc3_bgref  
(1.024V)  
Vccd  
SC/CT  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc2  
Vin  
Vref  
out  
sc3  
*
Vssd  
*
*
Vccd  
Vddd  
*
Vssd  
ABUSL0  
ABUSL1  
ABUSL2  
ABUSL3  
ABUSR0  
ABUSR1  
ABUSR2  
ABUSR3  
*
Vddd  
GPIO  
P6[0]  
GPIO  
P6[1]  
GPIO  
P6[2]  
GPIO  
P6[3]  
GPIO  
P15[4]  
GPIO  
v0  
i0  
v1  
DAC1  
i1  
USB IO  
DAC0  
*
P15[7]  
VIDAC  
USB IO  
v2  
i2  
v3  
DAC3  
i3  
*
DAC2  
P15[6]  
GPIO  
dac_vref (0.256V)  
vcmsel[1:0]  
vssd  
P5[7]  
GPIO  
P5[6]  
GPIO  
P5[5]  
GPIO  
P5[4]  
SIO  
+
DSM0  
DSM  
refs  
-
vssa  
dsm0_vcm_vref1 (0.8V)  
dsm0_vcm_vref2 (0.7V)  
vcm  
qtz_ref  
vref_vss_ext  
dsm0_qtz_vref2 (1.2V)  
dsm0_qtz_vref1 (1.024V)  
Vdda/3  
Vdda/4  
ExVrefL  
ExVrefR  
P15[5]  
GPIO  
P2[0]  
GPIO  
P2[1]  
GPIO  
P2[2]  
GPIO  
P12[7]  
SIO  
P12[6]  
GPIO  
AMUXBUSR  
AMUXBUSL  
76543210  
0123  
ANALOG  
BUS  
01234567  
3210  
ANALOG  
ANALOG ANALOG  
GLOBALS  
BUS  
GLOBALS  
*
P1[7]  
GPIO  
P1[6]  
*
*
P2[3]  
GPIO  
P2[4]  
*
VBE  
TS  
ADC  
*
:
Vss ref  
Vddio2  
LPF  
AGL[3]  
AGL[2]  
AGR[3]  
AGR[2]  
AGR[1]  
AGL[1]  
AGL[0]  
AGR[0]  
AMUXBUSR  
AMUXBUSL  
*
*
*
*
*
Mux Group  
*
*
*
Switch Group  
Connection  
*
*
Switch Resistance  
Notes:  
Small ( ~870 Ohms )  
Large ( ~200 Ohms)  
* Denotes pins on all packages  
LCD signals are not shown.  
Rev #60  
10-Feb-2012  
To preserve detail of this figure, this figure is best viewed with a PDF display program or printed on a 11" × 17" paper.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 53 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Analog local buses (abus) are routing resources located within  
the analog subsystem and are used to route signals between  
different analog blocks. There are eight abus routes in CY8C36,  
four in the left half (abusl [0:3]) and four in the right half (abusr  
[0:3]) as shown in Figure 8-2. Using the abus saves the analog  
globals and analog mux buses from being used for  
interconnecting the analog blocks.  
through the input buffer. The delta-sigma modulator performs the  
actual analog to digital conversion. The modulator over-samples  
the input and generates a serial data stream output. This high  
speed data stream is not useful for most applications without  
some type of post processing, and so is passed to the decimator  
through the Analog Interface block. The decimator converts the  
high speed serial data stream into parallel ADC results. The  
modulator/decimator frequency response is [(sin x)/x]4.  
Multiplexers and switches exist on the various buses to direct  
signals into and out of the analog blocks. A multiplexer can have  
only one connection on at a time, whereas a switch can have  
multiple connections on simultaneously. In Figure 8-2,  
multiplexers are indicated by grayed ovals and switches are  
indicated by transparent ovals.  
Figure 8-4. Delta-sigma ADC Block Diagram  
Positive  
Input Mux  
Delta  
Sigma  
Modulator  
Input  
Buffer  
12 to 20 Bit  
Result  
Decimator  
(Analog Routing)  
8.2 Delta-sigma ADC  
Negative  
EOC  
Input Mux  
The CY8C36 device contains one delta-sigma ADC. This ADC  
offers differential input, high resolution and excellent linearity,  
making it a good ADC choice for both audio signal processing  
and measurement applications. The converter can be configured  
to output 12-bit resolution at data rates of up to 192 ksps. At a  
fixed clock rate, resolution can be traded for faster data rates as  
shown in Table 8-1 and Figure 8-3.  
SOC  
Resolution and sample rate are controlled by the Decimator.  
Data is pipelined in the decimator; the output is a function of the  
last four samples. When the input multiplexer is switched, the  
output data is not valid until after the fourth sample after the  
switch.  
Table 8-1. Delta-sigma ADC Performance  
MaximumSampleRate  
8.2.2 Operational Modes  
Bits  
SINAD (dB)  
(sps)  
192 k  
384 k  
The ADC can be configured by the user to operate in one of four  
modes: Single Sample, Multi Sample, Continuous, or Multi  
Sample (Turbo). All four modes are started by either a write to  
the start bit in a control register or an assertion of the Start of  
Conversion (SoC) signal. When the conversion is complete, a  
status bit is set and the output signal End of Conversion (EoC)  
asserts high and remains high until the value is read by either the  
DMA controller or the CPU.  
12  
8
66  
43  
Figure8-3. Delta-sigmaADCSampleRates, Range=±1.024 V  
1000000  
8.2.2.1 Single Sample  
100000  
10000  
1000  
100  
In Single Sample mode, the ADC performs one sample  
conversion on a trigger. In this mode, the ADC stays in standby  
state waiting for the SoC signal to be asserted. When SoC is  
signaled the ADC performs four successive conversions. The  
first three conversions prime the decimator. The ADC result is  
valid and available after the fourth conversion, at which time the  
EoC signal is generated. To detect the end of conversion, the  
system may poll a control register for status or configure the  
external EoC signal to generate an interrupt or invoke a DMA  
request. When the transfer is done the ADC reenters the standby  
state where it stays until another SoC event.  
10  
1
6
8
10  
12  
8.2.2.2 Continuous  
Resolution, bits  
Continuous  
Multi-Sample  
Multi-SampleTurbo  
Continuous sample mode is used to take multiple successive  
samples of a single input signal. Multiplexing multiple inputs  
should not be done with this mode. There is a latency of three  
conversion times before the first conversion result is available.  
This is the time required to prime the decimator. After the first  
result, successive conversions are available at the selected  
sample rate.  
8.2.1 Functional Description  
The ADC connects and configures three basic components,  
input buffer, delta-sigma modulator, and decimator. The basic  
block diagram is shown in Figure 8-4. The signal from the input  
muxes is delivered to the delta-sigma modulator either directly or  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 54 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
8.2.2.3 Multi Sample  
8.3 Comparators  
Multi sample mode is similar to continuous mode except that the  
ADC is reset between samples. This mode is useful when the  
input is switched between multiple signals. The decimator is  
re-primed between each sample so that previous samples do not  
affect the current conversion. Upon completion of a sample, the  
next sample is automatically initiated. The results can be  
transferred using either firmware polling, interrupt, or DMA.  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four comparators in a  
device. Comparators have these features:  
Input offset factory trimmed to less than 5 mV  
Rail-to-rail common mode input range (VSSA to VDDA)  
Speed and power can be traded off by using one of three  
modes: fast, slow, or ultra low-power  
Comparator outputs can be routed to lookup tables to perform  
simple logic functions and then can also be routed to digital  
blocks  
8.2.3 Start of Conversion Input  
The SoC signal is used to start an ADC conversion. A digital  
clock or UDB output can be used to drive this input. It can be  
used when the sampling period must be longer than the ADC  
conversion time or when the ADC must be synchronized to other  
hardware. This signal is optional and does not need to be  
connected if ADC is running in a continuous mode.  
The positive input ofthe comparators may be optionally passed  
through a low pass filter. Two filters are provided  
Comparator inputs can be connections to GPIO, DAC outputs  
and SC block outputs  
8.2.4 End of Conversion Output  
8.3.1 Input and Output Interface  
The EoC signal goes high at the end of each ADC conversion.  
This signal may be used to trigger either an interrupt or DMA  
request.  
The positive and negative inputs to the comparators come from  
the analog global buses, the analog mux line, the analog local  
bus and precision reference through multiplexers. The output  
from each comparator could be routed to any of the two input  
LUTs. The output of that LUT is routed to the UDB DSI.  
Figure 8-5. Analog Comparator  
ANAIF  
From  
Analog  
Routing  
+
comp0  
_
+
_
From  
Analog  
Routing  
comp1  
From  
Analog  
Routing  
+
comp3  
_
+
From  
Analog  
Routing  
comp2  
_
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
LUT0  
LUT1  
LUT2  
LUT3  
UDBs  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 55 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
8.3.2 LUT  
Figure 8-7. Opamp Configurations  
a) Voltage Follower  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains four LUTs. The LUT is a  
two input, one output lookup table that is driven by any one or  
two of the comparators in the chip. The output of any LUT is  
routed to the digital system interface of the UDB array. From the  
digital system interface of the UDB array, these signals can be  
connected to UDBs, DMA controller, I/O, or the interrupt  
controller.  
Vout to Pin  
Opamp  
Vin  
The LUT control word written to a register sets the logic function  
on the output. The available LUT functions and the associated  
control word is shown in Table 8-2.  
b) External Uncommitted  
Opamp  
Table 8-2. LUT Function vs. Program Word and Inputs  
Vout to GPIO  
Opamp  
Control Word  
0000b  
0001b  
0010b  
0011b  
0100b  
0101b  
0110b  
0111b  
Output (A and B are LUT inputs)  
FALSE (‘0’)  
A AND B  
Vp to GPIO  
Vn to GPIO  
A AND (NOT B)  
A
(NOT A) AND B  
B
c) Internal Uncommitted  
Opamp  
A XOR B  
Vn  
A OR B  
To Internal Signals  
1000b  
1001b  
1010b  
1011b  
1100b  
1101b  
1110b  
A NOR B  
Vout to Pin  
GPIO Pin  
Opamp  
A XNOR B  
NOT B  
Vp  
A OR (NOT B)  
NOT A  
The opamp has three speed modes, slow, medium, and fast. The  
slow mode consumes the least amount of quiescent power and  
the fast mode consumes the most power. The inputs are able to  
swing rail-to-rail. The output swing is capable of rail-to-rail  
operation at low current output, within 50 mV of the rails. When  
driving high current loads (about 25 mA) the output voltage may  
only get within 500 mV of the rails.  
(NOT A) OR B  
A NAND B  
TRUE (‘1’)  
1111b  
8.4 Opamps  
The CY8C36 family of devices contain up to four general  
purpose opamps in a device.  
8.5 Programmable SC/CT Blocks  
Figure 8-6. Opamp  
The CY8C36 family of devices contains up to four switched  
capacitor/continuous time (SC/CT) blocks in a device. Each  
switched capacitor/continuous time block is built around a single  
rail-to-rail high bandwidth opamp.  
GPIO  
Analog  
Global Bus  
Switched capacitor is a circuit design technique that uses  
capacitors plus switches instead of resistors to create analog  
functions. These circuits work by moving charge between  
capacitors by opening and closing different switches.  
Nonoverlapping in phase clock signals control the switches, so  
that not all switches are ON simultaneously.  
Opamp  
Analog  
Global Bus  
GPIO  
VREF  
Analog  
Internal Bus  
=
Analog Switch  
GPIO  
The PSoC Creator tool offers a user friendly interface, which  
allows you to easily program the SC/CT blocks. Switch control  
and clock phase control configuration is done by PSoC Creator  
so users only need to determine the application use parameters  
such as gain, amplifier polarity, VREF connection, and so on.  
The opamp is uncommitted and can be configured as a gain  
stage or voltage follower, or output buffer on external or internal  
signals.  
See Figure 8-7. In any configuration, the input and output signals  
can all be connected to the internal global signals and monitored  
with an ADC, or comparator. The configurations are  
The same opamps and block interfaces are also connectable to  
an array of resistors which allows the construction of a variety of  
continuous time functions.  
implemented with switches between the signals and GPIO pins.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 56 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
The opamp and resistor array is programmable to perform  
various analog functions including  
The PGA is used in applications where the input signal may not  
be large enough to achieve the desired resolution in the ADC, or  
dynamic range of another SC/CT block such as a mixer. The gain  
is adjustable at runtime, including changing the gain of the PGA  
prior to each ADC sample.  
Naked operational amplifier – Continuous mode  
Unity-gain buffer – Continuous mode  
PGA – Continuous mode  
8.5.4 TIA  
Transimpedance amplifier (TIA) – Continuous mode  
Up/down mixer – Continuous mode  
The Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) converts an internal or  
external current to an output voltage. The TIA uses an internal  
feedback resistor in a continuous time configuration to convert  
input current to output voltage. For an input current Iin, the output  
voltage is VREF - Iin x Rfb, where VREF is the value placed on the  
non inverting input. The feedback resistor Rfb is programmable  
between 20 Kand 1 Mthrough a configuration register.  
Table 8-4 shows the possible values of Rfb and associated  
configuration settings.  
Sample and hold mixer (NRZ S/H) – Switched cap mode  
First order analog to digital modulator – Switched cap mode  
8.5.1 Naked Opamp  
The Naked Opamp presents both inputs and the output for  
connection to internal or external signals. The opamp has a unity  
gain bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz and output drive current up  
to 650 µA. This is sufficient for buffering internal signals (such as  
DAC outputs) and driving external loads greater than 7.5 kohms.  
Table 8-4. Feedback Resistor Settings  
Configuration Word  
Nominal Rfb (K)  
8.5.2 Unity Gain  
000b  
001b  
010b  
011b  
100b  
101b  
110b  
111b  
20  
30  
The Unity Gain buffer is a Naked Opamp with the output directly  
connected to the inverting input for a gain of 1.00. It has a –3 dB  
bandwidth greater than 6.0 MHz.  
40  
60  
8.5.3 PGA  
120  
250  
500  
1000  
The PGA amplifies an external or internal signal. The PGA can  
be configured to operate in inverting mode or noninverting mode.  
The PGA function may be configured for both positive and  
negative gains as high as 50 and 49 respectively. The gain is  
adjusted by changing the values of R1 and R2 as illustrated in  
Figure 8-8. The schematic in Figure 8-8 shows the configuration  
and possible resistor settings for the PGA. The gain is switched  
from inverting and non inverting by changing the shared select  
value of the both the input muxes. The bandwidth for each gain  
case is listed in Table 8-3.  
Figure 8-9. Continuous Time TIA Schematic  
R
fb  
Table 8-3. Bandwidth  
I
in  
Gain  
1
Bandwidth  
5.5 MHz  
340 kHz  
220 kHz  
215 kHz  
V
out  
V
ref  
24  
48  
50  
The TIA configuration is used for applications where an external  
sensor's output is current as a function of some type of stimulus  
such as temperature, light, magnetic flux etc. In a common  
application, the voltage DAC output can be connected to the  
Figure 8-8. PGA Resistor Settings  
V
REF TIA input to allow calibration of the external sensor bias  
R1  
R2  
Vin  
0
current by adjusting the voltage DAC output voltage.  
1
Vref  
8.6 LCD Direct Drive  
20k or 40k  
20k to 980k  
The PSoC LCD driver system is a highly configurable peripheral  
designed to allow PSoC to directly drive a broad range of LCD  
glass. All voltages are generated on chip, eliminating the need  
for external components. With a high multiplex ratio of up to 1/16,  
the CY8C36 family LCD driver system can drive a maximum of  
736 segments. The PSoC LCD driver module was also designed  
with the conservative power budget of portable devices in mind,  
enabling different LCD drive modes and power down modes to  
conserve power.  
S
Vref  
Vin  
0
1
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 57 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
PSoC Creator provides an LCD segment drive component. The  
component wizard provides easy and flexible configuration of  
LCD resources. You can specify pins for segments and  
commons along with other options. The software configures the  
device to meet the required specifications. This is possible  
because of the programmability inherent to PSoC devices.  
8.6.1 LCD Segment Pin Driver  
Each GPIO pin contains an LCD driver circuit. The LCD driver  
buffers the appropriate output of the LCD DAC to directly drive  
the glass of the LCD. A register setting determines whether the  
pin is a common or segment. The pin’s LCD driver then selects  
one of the six bias voltages to drive the I/O pin, as appropriate  
for the display data.  
Key features of the PSoC LCD segment system are:  
LCD panel direct driving  
8.6.2 Display Data Flow  
Type A (standard) and Type B (low-power) waveform support  
The LCD segment driver system reads display data and  
generates the proper output voltages to the LCD glass to  
produce the desired image. Display data resides in a memory  
buffer in the system SRAM. Each time you need to change the  
common and segment driver voltages, the next set of pixel data  
moves from the memory buffer into the Port Data Registers  
through the DMA.  
Wide operating voltage range support (2 V to 5 V) for LCD  
panels  
Static, 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5 bias voltage levels  
Internal biasvoltage generationthrough internal resistorladder  
Up to 62 total common and segment outputs  
8.6.3 UDB and LCD Segment Control  
Up to 1/16 multiplex for a maximum of 16 backplane/common  
outputs  
A UDB is configured to generate the global LCD control signals  
and clocking. This set of signals is routed to each LCD pin driver  
through a set of dedicated LCD global routing channels. In  
addition to generating the global LCD control signals, the UDB  
also produces a DMA request to initiate the transfer of the next  
frame of LCD data.  
Up to 62 front plane/segment outputs for direct drive  
Drives upto 736 total segments (16 backplane× 46 front plane)  
Up to 64 levels of software controlled contrast  
8.6.4 LCD DAC  
Ability to move display data from memory buffer to LCD driver  
through DMA (without CPU intervention)  
The LCD DAC generates the contrast control and bias voltage  
for the LCD system. The LCD DAC produces up to five LCD drive  
voltages plus ground, based on the selected bias ratio. The bias  
voltages are driven out to GPIO pins on a dedicated LCD bias  
bus, as required.  
Adjustable LCD refresh rate from 10 Hz to 150 Hz  
Ability to invert LCD display for negative image  
Three LCD driver drive modes, allowing power optimization  
Figure 8-10. LCD System  
8.7 CapSense  
The CapSense system provides a versatile and efficient means  
for measuring capacitance in applications such as touch sense  
buttons, sliders, proximity detection, etc. The CapSense system  
uses a configuration of system resources, including a few  
hardware functions primarily targeted for CapSense. Specific  
resource usage is detailed in the CapSense component in PSoC  
Creator.  
LCD  
Global  
DAC  
Clock  
UDB  
PIN  
A capacitive sensing method using a Delta-sigma Modulator  
(CSD) is used. It provides capacitance sensing using a switched  
capacitor technique with a delta-sigma modulator to convert the  
sensing current to a digital code.  
LCD Driver  
Block  
Display  
DMA  
RAM  
8.8 Temp Sensor  
Die temperature is used to establish programming parameters  
for writing flash. Die temperature is measured using a dedicated  
sensor based on a forward biased transistor. The temperature  
sensor has its own auxiliary ADC.  
PHUB  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 58 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
High and low speed / power modes  
8.9 DAC  
The CY8C36 parts contain up to four Digital to Analog  
Convertors (DACs). Each DAC is 8-bit and can be configured for  
either voltage or current output. The DACs support CapSense,  
power supply regulation, and waveform generation. Each DAC  
has the following features:  
8 Msps conversion rate for current output  
1 Msps conversion rate for voltage output  
Monotonic in nature  
Data and strobe inputs can be provided by the CPU or DMA,  
or routed directly from the DSI  
Adjustable voltage or current output in 255 steps  
Programmable step size (range selection)  
Dedicated low-resistance output pin for high-current mode  
Eight bits of calibration to correct ± 25 percent of gain error  
Source and sink option for current output  
Figure 8-11. DAC Block Diagram  
I source Range  
1x,8x, 64x  
Vout  
Reference  
Source  
Scaler  
Iout  
R
3R  
I sink Range  
1x,8x, 64x  
8.9.1 Current DAC  
Continuous time up and down mixing works for applications with  
input signals and local oscillator frequencies up to 1 MHz.  
The current DAC (IDAC) can be configured for the ranges 0 to  
31.875 µA, 0 to 255 µA, and 0 to 2.04 mA. The IDAC can be  
configured to source or sink current.  
Figure 8-12. Mixer Configuration  
C2 = 1.7 pF  
8.9.2 Voltage DAC  
C1 = 850 fF  
For the voltage DAC (VDAC), the current DAC output is routed  
through resistors. The two ranges available for the VDAC are 0  
to 1.02 V and 0 to 4.08 V. In voltage mode any load connected  
to the output of a DAC should be purely capacitive (the output of  
the VDAC is not buffered).  
R
mix 0 20k or 40k  
sc_clk  
Rmix 0 20k or 40k  
Vin  
8.10 Up/Down Mixer  
Vout  
0
1
In continuous time mode, the SC/CT block components are used  
to build an up or down mixer. Any mixing application contains an  
input signal frequency and a local oscillator frequency. The  
polarity of the clock, Fclk, switches the amplifier between  
inverting or noninverting gain. The output is the product of the  
input and the switching function from the local oscillator, with  
frequency components at the local oscillator plus and minus the  
signal frequency (Fclk + Fin and Fclk – Fin) and reduced-level  
frequency components at odd integer multiples of the local  
oscillator frequency. The local oscillator frequency is provided by  
the selected clock source for the mixer.  
Vref  
sc_clk  
8.11 Sample and Hold  
The main application for a sample and hold, is to hold a value  
stable while an ADC is performing a conversion. Some  
applications require multiple signals to be sampled  
simultaneously, such as for power calculations (V and I).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 59 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 8-13. Sample and Hold Topology  
(1 and 2 are opposite phases of a clock)  
device. It does not require special interfaces, debugging pods,  
simulators, or emulators. Only the standard programming  
connections are required to fully support debug.  
The PSoC Creator IDE software provides fully integrated  
programming and debug support for PSoC devices. The low cost  
MiniProg3 programmer and debugger is designed to provide full  
programming and debug support of PSoC devices in conjunction  
with the PSoC Creator IDE. PSoC JTAG, SWD, and SWV  
interfaces are fully compatible with industry standard third party  
tools.  
1  
2  
1  
C1  
C2  
V i  
Vref  
n
Vout  
1  
2  
2  
All DOC circuits are disabled by default and can only be enabled  
in firmware. If not enabled, the only way to reenable them is to  
erase the entire device, clear flash protection, and reprogram the  
device with new firmware that enables DOC. Disabling DOC  
features, robust flash protection, and hiding custom analog and  
digital functionality inside the PSoC device provide a level of  
security not possible with multichip application solutions.  
Additionally, all device interfaces can be permanently disabled  
(Device Security) for applications concerned about phishing  
attacks due to a maliciously reprogrammed device. Permanently  
disabling interfaces is not recommended in most applications  
because you cannot access the device later. Because all  
programming, debug, and test interfaces are disabled when  
device security is enabled, PSoCs with Device Security enabled  
may not be returned for failure analysis.  
1  
2  
1  
2  
1  
2  
V ref  
V
ref  
C3  
C4  
8.11.1 Down Mixer  
The SC/CT block can be used as a mixer to down convert an  
input signal. This circuit is a high bandwidth passive sample  
network that can sample input signals up to 14 MHz. This  
sampled value is then held using the opamp with a maximum  
clock rate of 4 MHz. The output frequency is at the difference  
between the input frequency and the highest integer multiple of  
the Local Oscillator that is less than the input.  
Table 9-1. Debug Configurations  
Debug and Trace Configuration  
GPIO Pins Used  
8.11.2 First Order Modulator – SC Mode  
All debug and trace disabled  
0
A first order modulator is constructed by placing the SC/CT block  
in an integrator mode and using a comparator to provide a 1-bit  
feedback to the input. Depending on this bit, a reference voltage  
is either subtracted or added to the input signal. The block output  
is the output of the comparator and not the integrator in the  
modulator case. The signal is downshifted and buffered and then  
processed by a decimator to make a delta-sigma converter or a  
counter to make an incremental converter. The accuracy of the  
sampled data from the first-order modulator is determined from  
several factors.  
JTAG  
4 or 5  
SWD  
2
1
3
SWV  
SWD + SWV  
9.1 JTAG Interface  
The IEEE 1149.1 compliant JTAG interface exists on four or five  
pins (the nTRST pin is optional). The JTAG interface is used for  
programming the flash memory, debugging, I/O scan chains, and  
JTAG device chaining.  
The main application for this modulator is for a low-frequency  
ADC with high accuracy. Applications include strain gauges,  
thermocouples, precision voltage, and current measurement.  
PSoC 3 has certain timing requirements to be met for entering  
programming mode through the JTAG interface. Due to these  
timing requirements, not all standard JTAG programmers, or  
standard JTAG file formats such as SVF or STAPL, can support  
PSoC 3 programming. The list of programmers that support  
PSoC 3 programming is available at  
9. Programming, Debug Interfaces,  
Resources  
PSoC devices include extensive support for programming,  
testing, debugging, and tracing both hardware and firmware.  
Three interfaces are available: JTAG, SWD, and SWV. JTAG and  
SWD support all programming and debug features of the device.  
JTAG also supports standard JTAG scan chains for board level  
test and chaining multiple JTAG devices to a single JTAG  
connection.  
http://www.cypress.com/go/programming.  
The JTAG clock frequency can be up to 14 MHz, or 1/3 of the  
CPU clock frequency for 8 and 16-bit transfers, or 1/5 of the CPU  
clock frequency for 32-bit transfers. By default, the JTAG pins are  
enabled on new devices but the JTAG interface can be disabled,  
allowing these pins to be used as GPIO instead.  
For more information on PSoC 3 Programming, refer to the  
PSoC® 3 Device Programming Specifications.  
Complete Debug on Chip (DoC) functionality enables full device  
debugging in the final system using the standard production  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 60 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 9-1. JTAG Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer  
VDD  
Host Programmer  
PSoC 3  
1, 2, 3, 4  
VDD  
V
DDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3  
TCK (P1[1]  
TCK  
5
5
TMS  
TMS (P1[0])  
TDO  
TDI  
TDI (P1[4])  
TDO (P1[3])  
nTRST (P1[5]) 6  
nTRST 6  
XRES or P1[2] 4, 7  
VSSD, VSSA  
XRES  
GND  
GND  
1 The voltage levels of Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming should be same. The  
Port 1 JTAG pins, XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) are powered by VDDIO1. So, VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage  
level as host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as  
host Programmer.  
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.  
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have  
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external  
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can  
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other  
supplies.  
4
For JTAG Programming, Device reset can also be done without connecting to the XRES pin or Power cycle mode by  
using the TMS,TCK,TDI, TDO pins of PSoC 3, and writing to a specific register. But this requires that the DPS setting in  
NVL is not equal to “Debug Ports Disabled”.  
5
By default, PSoC 3 is configured for 4-wire JTAG mode unless user changes the DPS setting. So the TMS pin is  
unidirectional. But if the DPS setting is changed to non-JTAG mode, the TMS pin in JTAG is bi-directional as the SWD  
Protocol has to be used for acquiring the PSoC 3 device initially. After switching from SWD to JTAG mode, the TMS pin  
will be uni-directional. In such a case, unidirectional buffer should not be used on TMS line.  
6
nTRST JTAG pin (P1[5]) cannot be used to reset the JTAG TAP controlller during first time programming of PSoC 3 as  
the default setting is 4-wire JTAG (nTRST disabled). Use the TMS, TCK pins to do a reset of JTAG TAP controller.  
7
If XRES pin is used by host, P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES  
pin). For devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48-pin  
devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 61 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
SWD can be enabled on only one of the pin pairs at a time. This  
only happens if, within 8 µs (key window) after reset, that pin pair  
(JTAG or USB) receives a predetermined sequence of 1s and 0s.  
SWD is used for debugging or for programming the flash  
memory.  
9.2 Serial Wire Debug Interface  
The SWD interface is the preferred alternative to the JTAG  
interface. It requires only two pins instead of the four or five  
needed by JTAG. SWD provides all of the programming and  
debugging features of JTAG at the same speed. SWD does not  
provide access to scan chains or device chaining. The SWD  
clock frequency can be up to 1/3 of the CPU clock frequency.  
The SWD interface can be enabled from the JTAG interface or  
disabled, allowing its pins to be used as GPIO. Unlike JTAG, the  
SWD interface can always be reacquired on any device during  
the key window. It can then be used to reenable the JTAG  
interface, if desired. When using SWD or JTAG pins as standard  
GPIO, make sure that the GPIO functionality and PCB circuits do  
not interfere with SWD or JTAG use.  
SWD uses two pins, either two of the JTAG pins (TMS and TCK)  
or the USBIO D+ and D– pins. The USBIO pins are useful for in  
system programming of USB solutions that would otherwise  
require a separate programming connector. One pin is used for  
the data clock and the other is used for data input and output.  
Figure 9-2. SWD Interface Connections between PSoC 3 and Programmer  
VDD  
Host Programmer  
PSoC 3  
1, 2, 3  
VDD  
VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO1, VDDIO2, VDDIO3  
SWDCK  
SWDCK (P1[1] or P15[7])  
SWDIO (P1[0] or P15[6])  
SWDIO  
XRES  
3, 4  
XRES or P1[2]  
GND  
VSSD, VSSA  
GND  
1
The voltage levels of the Host Programmer and the PSoC 3 voltage domains involved in Programming  
should be the same. XRES pin (XRES_N or P1[2]) is powered by VDDIO1. The USB SWD pins are  
powered by VDDD. So for Programming using the USB SWD pins with XRES pin, the VDDD, VDDIO1 of  
PSoC 3 should be at the same voltage level as Host VDD. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDA, VDDIO0  
VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same voltage level as host Programmer. The Port 1 SWD pins are  
powered by VDDIO1. So VDDIO1 of PSoC 3 should be at same voltage level as host VDD for Port 1 SWD  
,
programming. Rest of PSoC 3 voltage domains ( VDDD, VDDA, VDDIO0, VDDIO2, VDDIO3) need not be at the same  
voltage level as host Programmer.  
2
Vdda must be greater than or equal to all other power supplies (Vddd, Vddio’s) in PSoC 3.  
3
For Power cycle mode Programming, XRES pin is not required. But the Host programmer must have  
the capability to toggle power (Vddd, Vdda, All Vddio’s) to PSoC 3. This may typically require external  
interface circuitry to toggle power which will depend on the programming setup. The power supplies can  
be brought up in any sequence, however, once stable, VDDA must be greater than or equal to all other  
supplies.  
4
P1[2] will be configured as XRES by default only for 48-pin devices (without dedicated XRES pin). For  
devices with dedicated XRES pin, P1[2] is GPIO pin by default. So use P1[2] as Reset pin only for 48-  
pin devices, but use dedicated XRES pin for rest of devices.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 62 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
erase. Individual flash blocks can be erased, programmed, and  
verified, if block security settings permit.  
9.3 Debug Features  
Using the JTAG or SWD interface, the CY8C36 supports the  
following debug features:  
9.7 Device Security  
Halt and single-step the CPU  
PSoC 3 offers an advanced security feature called device  
security, which permanently disables all test, programming, and  
debug ports, protecting your application from external access.  
The device security is activated by programming a 32-bit key  
(0×50536F43) to a Write Once Latch (WOL).  
View and change CPU and peripheral registers, and RAM  
addresses  
Eight program address breakpoints  
One memory access breakpoint—break on reading or writing  
The Write Once Latch is a type of nonvolatile latch (NVL). The  
cell itself is an NVL with additional logic wrapped around it. Each  
WOL device contains four bytes (32 bits) of data. The wrapper  
outputs a ‘1’ if a super-majority (28 of 32) of its bits match a  
pre-determined pattern (0×50536F43); it outputs a ‘0’ if this  
majority is not reached. When the output is 1, the Write Once NV  
latch locks the part out of Debug and Test modes; it also  
permanently gates off the ability to erase or alter the contents of  
the latch. Matching all bits is intentionally not required, so that  
single (or few) bit failures do not deassert the WOL output. The  
state of the NVL bits after wafer processing is truly random with  
no tendency toward 1 or 0.  
The WOL only locks the part after the correct 32-bit key  
(0×50536F43) is loaded into the NVL's volatile memory,  
programmed into the NVL's nonvolatile cells, and the part is  
reset. The output of the WOL is only sampled on reset and used  
to disable the access. This precaution prevents anyone from  
reading, erasing, or altering the contents of the internal memory.  
any memory address and data value  
Break on a sequence of breakpoints (non recursive)  
Debugging at the full speed of the CPU  
CompatiblewithPSoCCreatorandMiniProg3programmerand  
debugger  
Standard JTAG programming and debugging interfaces make  
CY8C36 compatible with other popular third-party tools (for  
example, ARM / Keil)  
9.4 Trace Features  
The CY8C36 supports the following trace features when using  
JTAG or SWD:  
Trace the 8051 program counter (PC), accumulator register  
(ACC), and one SFR / 8051 core RAM register  
Trace depth up to 1000 instructions if all registers are traced,  
or 2000 instructions if only the PC is traced (on devices that  
include trace memory)  
The user can write the key into the WOL to lock out external  
access only if no flash protection is set (see “Flash Security” on  
page 21). However, after setting the values in the WOL, a user  
still has access to the part until it is reset. Therefore, a user can  
write the key into the WOL, program the flash protection data,  
and then reset the part to lock it.  
Program address trigger to start tracing  
Trace windowing, that is, only trace when the PC is within a  
given range  
Two modes for handling trace buffer full: continuous (overwriting  
the oldest trace data) or break when trace buffer is full  
If the device is protected with a WOL setting, Cypress cannot  
perform failure analysis and, therefore, cannot accept RMAs  
from customers. The WOL can be read out through the SWD port  
to electrically identify protected parts. The user can write the key  
in WOL to lock out external access only if no flash protection is  
set. For more information on how to take full advantage of the  
security features in PSoC see the PSoC 3 TRM.  
9.5 Single Wire Viewer Interface  
The SWV interface is closely associated with SWD but can also  
be used independently. SWV data is output on the JTAG  
interface’s TDO pin. If using SWV, you must configure the device  
for SWD, not JTAG. SWV is not supported with the JTAG  
interface.  
Disclaimer  
SWV is ideal for application debug where it is helpful for the  
firmware to output data similar to 'printf' debugging on PCs. The  
SWV is ideal for data monitoring, because it requires only a  
single pin and can output data in standard UART format or  
Manchester encoded format. For example, it can be used to tune  
a PID control loop in which the output and graphing of the three  
error terms greatly simplifies coefficient tuning.  
Note the following details of the flash code protection features on  
Cypress devices.  
Cypress products meet the specifications contained in their  
particular Cypress data sheets. Cypress believes that its family  
of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the  
market today, regardless of how they are used. There may be  
methods, unknown to Cypress, that can breach the code  
protection features. Any of these methods, to our knowledge,  
would be dishonest and possibly illegal. Neither Cypress nor any  
other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of  
their code. Code protection does not mean that we are  
guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”  
Cypress is willing to work with the customer who is concerned  
about the integrity of their code. Code protection is constantly  
evolving. We at Cypress are committed to continuously  
improving the code protection features of our products.  
The following features are supported in SWV:  
32 virtual channels, each 32 bits long  
Simple, efficient packing and serializing protocol  
Supports standard UART format (N81)  
9.6 Programming Features  
The JTAG and SWD interfaces provide full programming  
support. The entire device can be erased, programmed, and  
verified. You can increase flash protection levels to protect  
firmware IP. Flash protection can only be reset after a full device  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 63 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Application Notes: PSoC application notes discuss a particular  
application of PSoC in depth; examples include brushless DC  
motor control and on-chip filtering. Application notes often  
include example projects in addition to the application note  
document.  
10. Development Support  
The CY8C36 family has a rich set of documentation,  
development tools, and online resources to assist you during  
your development process. Visit  
psoc.cypress.com/getting-started to find out more.  
Technical Reference Manual: The Technical Reference Manual  
(TRM) contains all the technical detail you need to use a PSoC  
device, including a complete description of all PSoC registers.  
10.1 Documentation  
A suite of documentation, supports the CY8C36 family to ensure  
that you can find answers to your questions quickly. This section  
contains a list of some of the key documents.  
10.2 Online  
In addition to print documentation, the Cypress PSoC forums  
connect you with fellow PSoC users and experts in PSoC from  
around the world, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  
Software User Guide: A step-by-step guide for using PSoC  
Creator. The software user guide shows you how the PSoC  
Creator build process works in detail, how to use source control  
with PSoC Creator, and much more.  
10.3 Tools  
With industry standard cores, programming, and debugging  
interfaces, the CY8C36 family is part of a development tool  
ecosystem. Visit us at www.cypress.com/go/psoccreator for the  
latest information on the revolutionary, easy to use PSoC Creator  
IDE, supported third party compilers, programmers, debuggers,  
and development kits.  
Component data sheets: The flexibility of PSoC allows the  
creation of new peripherals (components) long after the device  
has gone into production. Component data sheets provide all of  
the information needed to select and use a particular component,  
including a functional description, API documentation, example  
code, and AC/DC specifications.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 64 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11. Electrical Specifications  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted. The unique flexibility of the PSoC UDBs and analog blocks enable many functions to be implemented in PSoC Creator  
components, see the component data sheets for full AC/DC specifications of individual functions. See the Example Peripherals on  
page 40 for further explanation of PSoC Creator components.  
11.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
Table 11-1. Absolute Maximum Ratings DC Specifications [17]  
Parameter  
Tstorag  
Description  
Storage temperature  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Recommended storage  
–55  
25  
125  
°C  
temperature is 0 °C–50 °C.  
Exposure to storage temperatures  
above 125 °C for extended periods  
may affect device reliability  
Vdda  
Vddd  
Analog supply voltage relative to  
Vssd  
–0.5  
–0.5  
6
6
V
V
Digital supply voltage relative to  
Vssd  
Vddio  
Vcca  
Vccd  
Vssa  
I/O supply voltage relative to Vssd  
Direct analog core voltage input  
Direct digital core voltage input  
Analog ground voltage  
–0.5  
–0.5  
6
V
V
V
V
1.95  
1.95  
–0.5  
Vssd – 0.5  
Vssd +  
0.5  
Vgpio[18]  
Vsio  
DC input voltage on GPIO  
DC input voltage on SIO  
Includes signals sourced by Vdda Vssd – 0.5  
and routed internal to the pin  
Vddio +  
0.5  
V
Output disabled  
Output enabled  
–40 °C to +85 °C  
–40 °C to +125 °C  
Vssd – 0.5  
7
6
V
V
Vssd – 0.5  
Ivddio [19]  
Current per Vddio supply pin  
100  
40  
41  
28  
59  
2
mA  
IGPIO  
ISIO  
GPIO current  
–30  
–49  
–56  
mA  
mA  
mA  
V
SIO current  
IUSBIO  
VEXTREF  
LU  
USBIO current  
ADC external reference inputs  
Latch up current [20]  
Pins P0[3], P3[2]  
VSSA tied to VSSD  
–140  
2200  
750  
500  
140  
mA  
V
Electrostatic discharge voltage,  
Human body model  
ESDHBM  
ESDCDM  
VSSA not tied to VSSD  
V
Electro-static discharge voltage  
Charge Device Model  
V
Note Usage above the absolute maximum conditions listed in Table 11-1 may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to  
maximum conditions for extended periods of time may affect device reliability. When used below maximum conditions but above  
normal operating conditions the device may not operate to specification.  
Notes  
17. Usage above the absolute maximum conditions listed in Table 11-1 may cause permanent damage to the device. Exposure to Absolute Maximum conditions for  
extended periods of time may affect device reliability. The Maximum Storage Temperature is 150 °C in compliance with JEDEC Standard JESD22-A103, High  
Temperature Storage Life. When used below Absolute Maximum conditions but above normal operating conditions, the device may not operate to specification.  
18. The Vddio supply voltage must be greater than the maximum analog voltage on the associated GPIO pins. Maximum analog voltage on GPIO pin Vddio Vdda.  
19. Maximum value 100 mA of Iddio applies only to –40 °C to +85 °C range and the limit of Iddio parameter for the –40 °C to +125 °C range is 40 mA.  
20. Meets or exceeds JEDEC Spec EIA/JESD78 IC Latch-up Test.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 65 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.2 Device Level Specifications  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.2.1 Device Level Specifications  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
VDDA  
Analog supply voltage and input to Analog core regulator enabled  
analog core regulator  
1.8  
5.5  
V
VDDA  
VDDD  
VDDD  
Analog supply voltage, analog  
regulator bypassed  
Analog core regulator disabled  
Digital core regulator enabled  
Digital core regulator disabled  
1.71  
1.8  
1.8  
1.89  
V
V
V
Digital supply voltage relative to  
VSSD  
VD-  
[21]  
DA  
Digital supply voltage, digital  
regulator bypassed  
1.71  
1.8  
1.89  
[22]  
[21]  
VDDIO  
I/O supply voltage relative to VSSIO  
1.71  
1.71  
VDDA  
1.89  
V
V
VCCA  
Direct analog core voltage input  
(Analog regulator bypass)  
Analog core regulator disabled  
Digital core regulator disabled  
1.8  
VCCD  
Direct digital core voltage input  
(Digital regulator bypass)  
1.71  
1.8  
1.89  
V
Notes  
21. VDDX = 3.3 V.  
22. Based on device specifications (not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 66 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Idd[23, 24] Active Mode, VDD = 1.71 V - 5.5 V  
ExecutefromCPUinstructionbuffer,  
see FlashProgramMemoryonpage  
21  
CPU at 3 MHz  
CPU at 6 MHz  
CPU at 12 MHz  
CPU at 24 MHz  
CPU at 48 MHz  
CPU at 62 MHz  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
1.3  
1.6  
4.8  
4.9  
2.1  
2.3  
5.6  
5.8  
3.5  
3.8  
7.1  
9.0  
6.3  
6.6  
10  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
15.8  
11.5  
12  
15.5  
21.7  
16  
16  
19.5  
27.8  
Notes  
23. The current consumption of additional peripherals that are implemented only in programmed logic blocks can be found in their respective data sheets, available  
in PSoC Creator, the integrated design environment. To compute total current, find CPU current at frequency of interest and add peripheral currents for your  
particular system from the device data sheet and component data sheets.  
24. Total current for all power domains: digital (IDDD), analog (IDDA), and I/Os (IDDIO0, 1, 2, 3). All I/Os floating.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 67 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Sleep Mode[25]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
V
DD = VDDIO = 4.5 V–5.5 V T = –40 °C  
1.1  
1.1  
15  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
CPU OFF  
RTC = ON (= ECO32K ON, in low  
power mode)  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
DD = VDDIO = 2.7 V–3.6 V T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
20.3  
1
Sleep timer = ON (= ILO ON at  
1 kHz) [26]  
WDT = OFF  
I2C Wake = OFF  
1
Comparator = OFF  
POR = ON  
SIO Pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
T = 85 °C  
12  
T = 125 °C  
18.5  
2.2  
16.2  
2.2  
CC = VDDIO  
=
T = 25 °C  
1.71 V–1.95 V  
T = 125 °C  
Comparator = ON  
CPU = OFF  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7 V–3.6 V T = 25 °C  
RTC = OFF  
Sleep timer = OFF  
WDT = OFF  
I2C Wake = OFF  
POR = ON  
SIO Pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
I2C Wake = ON  
VDD = VDDIO = 2.7 V–3.6 V T = 25 °C  
2.2  
µA  
CPU = OFF  
RTC = OFF  
Sleep timer = OFF  
WDT = OFF  
Comparator = OFF  
POR = ON  
SIO Pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
Notes  
25. If Vccd and Vcca are externally regulated, the voltage difference between Vccd and Vcca must be less than 50 mV.  
26. Sleep timer generates periodic interrupts to wake up the CPU. This specification applies only to those times that the CPU is off.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 68 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-2. DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Hibernate Mode[27]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
V
DD = VDDIO = 4.5 V–5.5 V T = –40 °C  
0.2  
0.5  
4.1  
17.7  
0.2  
0.2  
3.2  
15.3  
0.2  
0.2  
3.3  
12.4  
0.3  
1.4  
1.1  
0.7  
10  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
nA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
pA  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
DD = VDDIO = 2.7 V–3.6 V T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
Hibernate mode current  
All regulators and oscillators off.  
SRAM retention  
GPIO interrupts are active  
SIO Pins in single ended input,  
unregulated output mode  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
CC = VDDIO  
=
T = –40 °C  
T = 25 °C  
T = 85 °C  
T = 125 °C  
1.71 V–1.95 V  
IDDAR  
IDDDR  
IIB  
Analog current consumption while VDDA < 3.6 V  
device is reset [28]  
VDDA > 3.6 V  
Digital current consumption while  
device is reset [28]  
VDDD < 3.6 V  
VDDD > 3.6 V  
Input bias current [28]  
T = 25 °C  
Notes  
27. If Vccd and Vcca are externally regulated, the voltage difference between Vccd and Vcca must be less than 50 mV.  
28. Based on device characterization (not production tested). USBIO pins tied to ground (VSSD).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 69 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-1. Active Mode Current vs FCPU, VDD = 3.3 V, Temperature = 25 °C  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 70 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-3. AC Specifications[29]  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
1.71 V Vddd 5.5 V, -40°C Ta  
85°C and Tj 100°C  
DC  
67  
MHz  
FCPU  
CPU frequency  
1.71 V Vddd 5.5 V, -40°C Ta  
125°C and Tj 150°C  
DC  
DC  
DC  
50  
67  
50  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
1.71 V Vddd 5.5 V, -40°C Ta  
85°C and Tj 100°C  
Fbusclk  
Bus frequency  
Vdd ramp rate  
1.71 V Vddd 5.5 V, -40°C Ta  
125°C and Tj 150°C  
Svdd  
0.066  
10  
V/µs  
µs  
Tio_init  
Time from Vddd/Vdda/Vccd/Vcca   
IPOR to I/O ports set to their reset  
states  
Vcca/Vdda = regulated from  
Vdda/Vddd, no PLL used, fast IMO  
boot mode (48 MHz typ.)  
33  
66  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Time from Vddd/Vdda/Vccd/Vcca   
PRES to CPU executing code at  
reset vector  
Tstartup  
Vcca/Vccd = regulated from  
Vdda/Vddd, no PLL used, slow  
IMO boot mode (12 MHz typ.)  
Tsleep  
Wakeup from sleep mode - Occur- 1.71 V Vddd 5.5 V, Tj 100°C  
rence of LVD interrupt to beginning  
15  
of execution of next CPU instruction  
Thibernate  
Wakeup from hibernate mode -  
Application of external interrupt to  
beginning of execution of next CPU  
instruction  
100  
Figure 11-2. Fcpu vs. Vdd  
5.5V  
Valid Operating Region  
3.3V  
1.71V  
0V  
DC  
1 MHz  
10 MHz  
50 MHz  
CPU Frequency  
Note  
29. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 71 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.3 Power Regulators  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.3.1 Digital Core Regulator  
Table 11-4. Digital Core Regulator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vddd  
Description  
Input voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
-
Max  
Units  
V
1.8  
5.5  
Vccd  
Output voltage  
-
-
1.80  
1
-
-
V
Regulator output capacitance  
Total capacitance on the two Vccd pins.  
Each capacitor is ±10%, X5R ceramic or  
better, see Power System on page 29  
µF  
Figure 11-3. Regulators VCC vs VDD  
Figure 11-4. Digital Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 72 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.3.2 Analog Core Regulator  
Table 11-5. Analog Core Regulator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vdda  
Description  
Input voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
-
Max  
Units  
V
1.8  
5.5  
Vcca  
Output voltage  
-
-
1.80  
1
-
-
V
Regulator output capacitor  
±10%, X5R ceramic or better (X7R for Ta  
> 85°C)  
µF  
Figure 11-5. Analog Regulator PSRR vs Frequency and VDD  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 73 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.4 Inputs and Outputs  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.4.1 GPIO  
Table 11-6. GPIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Input voltage high threshold  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Vih  
Vil  
CMOS Input, PRT[x]CTL = 0  
CMOS Input, PRT[x]CTL = 0  
0.7 Vddio  
-
-
-
-
V
V
V
-
0.3 Vddio  
Vih  
LVTTL Input, PRT[x]CTL = 1,Vddio 0.7 x Vddio  
< 2.7 V  
-
Vih  
Vil  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Output voltage high  
LVTTLInput, PRT[x]CTL=1, Vddio  
V  
2.0  
-
-
-
-
V
V
V
LVTTL Input, PRT[x]CTL = 1,Vddio  
< 2.7 V  
-
-
0.3 x Vddio  
0.8  
Vil  
LVTTLInput, PRT[x]CTL=1, Vddio  
V  
Voh  
Ioh = 4 mA at 3.3 Vddio  
Ioh = 1 mA at 1.8 Vddio  
Iol = 6 mA at 3.3 Vddio  
Iol = 3 mA at 1.8 Vddio  
Iol = 3 mA at 3.3 Vddio  
Vddio - 0.6  
-
-
-
V
V
Vddio - 0.5  
-
Vol  
Output voltage low  
0.6  
0.6  
0.4  
8.5  
8.5  
2
V
V
V
Rpullup  
Pull up resistor  
3.5  
3.5  
-
5.6  
5.6  
-
k  
k  
nA  
Rpulldown Pull down resistor  
Iil  
Input leakage current (absolute  
25°C, Vddio = 3.0 V  
value)[30]  
CIN  
Input capacitance[30]  
GPIOs not shared with opamp  
outputs, MHz ECO or kHzECO  
4
5
7
7
pF  
pF  
GPIOs shared with MHz ECO or  
kHzECO[31]  
GPIOs shared with opamp outputs  
-
18  
-
pF  
Vh  
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt-Trigger)[30]  
40  
mV  
Idiode  
Current through protection diode to  
Vddio and Vssio  
-
-
100  
µA  
Rglobal  
Rmux  
Resistance pin to analog global bus  
Resistance pin to analog mux bus  
25°C, Vddio = 3.0 V  
25°C, Vddio = 3.0 V  
320  
220  
Notes  
30. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
31. For information on designing with PSoC 3 oscillators, refer to the application note, AN54439 - PSoC® 3 and PSoC 5 External Oscillator.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 74 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-6. GPIO Output High Voltage and Current  
Figure 11-7. GPIO Output Low Voltage and Current  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 75 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-7. GPIO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
TriseF  
Description  
Conditions  
3 V Vddio Cload = 25 pF  
3 V Vddio Cload = 25 pF  
3 V Vddio Cload = 25 pF  
3 V Vddio Cload = 25 pF  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
12  
Units  
ns  
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode[29]  
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode[29]  
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode[29]  
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode[29]  
GPIO output operating frequency  
TfallF  
12  
ns  
TriseS  
TfallS  
60  
ns  
60  
ns  
3 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, fast strong drive  
mode  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
33  
24  
20  
16  
7
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
1.71 V < Vddio < 3 V, fast strong drive 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
mode  
Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Fgpioout  
3 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, slow strong drive 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
mode  
Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
7
1.71 V < Vddio < 3 V, slow strong drive 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
mode  
3.5  
3.5  
Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
GPIO input operating frequency  
90/10% better than 60/40 duty  
cycle, -40°C Ta 85°C and Tj   
100°C  
-
-
-
-
66  
50  
MHz  
MHz  
Fgpioin  
1.71 V < Vddio < 5.5 V  
90/10% better than 60/40 duty  
cycle, -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj   
150°C  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 76 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.4.2 SIO  
Table 11-8. SIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vinmax  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Maximum input voltage  
All allowed values of Vddio and  
Vddd  
5.5  
V
Vinref  
Input voltage reference (Differ-  
ential input mode)  
0.5  
-
0.52 Vddio  
V
Output voltage reference (Regulated output mode)  
Vddio > 3.7  
Voutref  
1
1
-
-
Vddio-1  
V
V
Vddio < 3.7  
Vddio - 0.5  
Input voltage high threshold  
GPIO mode  
CMOS input  
0.7 Vddio  
-
-
V
V
Vih  
Vil  
Differential input mode  
With hysteresis  
SIO_ref +  
0.2  
Input voltage low threshold  
GPIO mode  
CMOS input  
-
-
0.3 Vddio  
V
V
Differential input mode  
With hysteresis  
SIO_ref –  
0.2  
Output voltage high  
Unregulated mode  
Regulated mode [32]  
Ioh = 4 mA, Vddio = 3.3 V  
Ioh = 1 mA  
Vddio - 0.4  
-
-
-
V
V
SIO_ref -  
0.65  
SIO_ref +  
0.2  
Voh  
Vol  
Regulated mode [32]  
Output voltage low  
Ioh = 0.1 mA  
SIO_ref - 0.3  
-
SIO_ref +  
0.2  
V
Vddio = 3.30 V, Iol = 25 mA  
Vddio = 1.80 V, Iol = 4 mA  
-
-
-
-
0.8  
0.4  
0.4  
8.5  
8.5  
V
V
VDDIO = 3.3 V, IOL = 20 mA  
V
Rpullup  
Rpulldown  
Iil  
Pull up resistor  
3.5  
3.5  
5.6  
5.6  
k  
k  
Pull down resistor  
Input leakage current (absolute  
value)[33]  
Vih < Vddsio  
25°C, Vddsio = 3.0 V, Vih = 3.0 V  
25°C, Vddsio = 0 V, Vih = 3.0 V  
-
-
-
-
14  
10  
7
nA  
µA  
pF  
Vih > Vddsio  
Input Capacitance[33]  
Cin  
Vh  
-
-
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt-Trigger)[33]  
Single ended mode (GPIO mode)  
Differential mode  
-
40  
35  
-
mV  
mV  
µA  
Current through protection diode  
to Vssio  
100  
Idiode  
Notes  
32. See Figure 6-8 on page 35for more information on SIO reference.  
33. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 77 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-8. SIO Output High Voltage and Current, Unregulated Mode  
Figure 11-9. SIO Output Low Voltage and Current, Unregulated Mode  
Figure 11-10. SIO Output High Voltage and Current, Regulated Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 78 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-9. SIO AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
TriseF  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Rise time in Fast Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[29]  
Cload = 25 pF, Vddio = 3.3 V  
12  
ns  
TfallF  
TriseS  
TfallS  
Fall time in Fast Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[29]  
Cload = 25 pF, Vddio = 3.3 V  
Cload = 25 pF, Vddio = 3.0 V  
Cload = 25 pF, Vddio = 3.0 V  
12  
80  
70  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Rise time in Slow Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[29]  
Fall time in Slow Strong Mode  
(90/10%)[29]  
SIO output operating frequency  
3.3 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, Unregulated 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
-
-
-
-
-
-
33  
24  
16  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
output (GPIO) mode, fast strong  
drive mode  
Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
90/10% Vddio into 25 pF, -40°C   
Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
1.71 V<Vddio<3.3 V, Unregulated 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF  
output (GPIO) mode, fast strong  
drive mode  
3.3 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, Unregulated 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF  
output (GPIO) mode, slow strong  
drive mode  
-
-
-
-
5
4
MHz  
MHz  
Fsioout  
1.71 V<Vddio<3.3 V, Unregulated 90/10% Vddio into 25 pF  
output (GPIO) mode, slow strong  
drive mode  
3.3 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, Regulated Output continuously switching into  
output mode, fast strong drive mode 25 pF  
-
-
-
-
-
-
20  
10  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
1.71 V < Vddio < 3.3 V, Regulated Output continuously switching into  
output mode, fast strong drive mode 25 pF  
1.71 V < Vddio < 5.5 V, Regulated Output continuously switching into  
2.5  
output mode, slow strong drive  
mode  
25 pF  
SIO input operating frequency  
90/10% better than 60/40 duty  
cycle, -40°C Ta 85°C and  
Tj 100°C  
-
-
-
-
66  
50  
MHz  
MHz  
Fsioin  
1.71 V < Vddio < 5.5 V  
90/10% better than 60/40 duty  
cycle, -40°C Ta 125°C and  
Tj 150°C  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 79 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-11. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Figure 11-12. SIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow Strong Mode, VDDIO = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 80 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.4.3 USBIO  
Table 11-10. USBIO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Rusbi  
Description  
USB D+ pull up resistance  
USB D+ pull up resistance  
Static output high  
Conditions  
With idle bus  
Min  
0.900  
1.425  
2.8  
Typ  
Max  
1.575  
3.090  
3.6  
Units  
k  
-
-
-
Rusba  
While receiving traffic  
k  
Vohusb  
15 k±5% to Vss, internal pull up  
enabled  
V
Volusb  
Static output low  
15 k±5% to Vss, internal pull up  
enabled  
-
-
0.3  
V
Vihgpio  
Vilgpio  
Vohgpio  
Volgpio  
Vdi  
Input voltage high, GPIO mode  
Input voltage low, GPIO mode  
VDDD 3 V  
VDDD 3 V  
2
-
V
V
V
V
V
V
0.8  
-
Output voltage high, GPIO mode Ioh = 4 mA, Vddio 3 V  
2.4  
-
Output voltage low, GPIO mode  
Differential input sensitivity  
Iol = 4 mA, Vddio 3 V  
-
0.3  
0.2  
2.5  
|(D+)-(D-)|  
-
-
Vcm  
Differential input common mode  
range  
0.8  
-
Vse  
Single ended receiver threshold  
PS/2 pull up resistance  
0.8  
3
-
-
2
7
V
Rps2  
In PS/2 mode, with PS/2 pull up  
enabled  
k  
External USB series resistor  
USB driver output impedance  
In series with each USB pin  
21.78  
(-1%)  
22  
-
22.22  
(+1%)  
Rext  
Zo  
Including Rext, -40°C Ta 85°C  
and Tj 100°C  
28  
44  
Including Rext, -40°C Ta 125°C  
and Tj 150°C  
28  
-
46  
Cin  
USB transceiver input capacitance  
-
-
-
-
20  
2
pF  
nA  
Input leakage current (absolute  
value)  
25°C, Vddio = 3.0 V  
Iil [34]  
Note  
34. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 81 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-13. USBIO Output High Voltage and Current, GPIO Mode  
Figure 11-14. USBIO Output Low Voltage and Current, GPIO Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 82 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-11. USBIO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Tdrate  
Full-speed data rate average bit rate  
12 - 0.25%  
12  
12 +  
0.25%  
MHz  
Tdjr1  
Tdjr2  
Tudj1  
Receiver data jitter tolerance to next  
transition  
-8  
-5  
-
-
-
8
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
Receiver data jitter tolerance to pair  
transition  
Driver differential jitter to next  
transition  
-3.5  
3.5  
Tudj2  
Driver differential jitter to pair transition  
-4  
-2  
-
-
4
5
ns  
ns  
Tfdeop  
Source jitter fordifferentialtransitionto  
SE0 transition  
Tfeopt  
Tfeopr  
Tfst  
Source SE0 interval of EOP  
Receiver SE0 interval of EOP  
160  
82  
-
-
-
-
175  
-
ns  
ns  
ns  
Width of SE0 interval during differ-  
ential transition  
14  
Fgpio_out GPIO mode output operating  
frequency  
3 V Vddd 5.5 V  
-
-
20  
6
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
Vddd = 1.71 V  
-
-
Tr_gpio  
Rise time, GPIO mode, 10%/90%  
Vddd  
Vddd > 3 V, 25 pF load  
Vddd = 1.71 V, 25 pF load  
12  
40  
12  
40  
ns  
Tf_gpio  
Fall time, GPIO mode, 90%/10% Vddd Vddd > 3 V, 25 pF load  
Vddd = 1.71 V, 25 pF load  
ns  
ns  
Figure 11-15. USBIO Output Rise and Fall Times, GPIO Mode, VDDD = 3.3 V, 25 pF Load  
Table 11-12. USB Driver AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Tr Transition rise time  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
20  
Units  
ns  
-
Tf  
Transition fall time  
20  
ns  
TR  
Vcrs  
Rise/fall time matching  
Output signal crossover voltage  
VUSB_5, VUSB_3.3, see  
90%  
1.3  
111%  
2
-
V
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 83 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.4.4 XRES  
Table 11-13. XRES DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vih  
Description  
Input voltage high threshold  
Input voltage low threshold  
Pull up resistor  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
-
Max  
Units  
V
CMOS Input, PRT[x]CTL = 0  
CMOS Input, PRT[x]CTL = 0  
0.7 Vddio  
-
Vil  
-
3.5  
-
-
0.3 Vddio  
V
Rpullup  
Cin  
5.6  
3
8.5  
k  
pF  
Input capacitance[29]  
-
-
Vh  
Input voltage hysteresis  
(Schmitt-Trigger)[29]  
-
100  
mV  
Idiode  
Current through protection diode to  
Vddio and Vssio  
-
-
100  
µA  
Table 11-14. XRES AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Reset pulse width  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Treset  
1
-
-
µs  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 84 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5 Analog Peripherals  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.5.1 Opamp  
Table 11-15. Opamp DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Power mode = high  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
±2.5  
Units  
mV  
Vioff  
-
-
-
-
±5.0  
mV  
-
±30  
µV / °C  
%
TCVos  
Ge1  
Vi  
Input offset voltage drift with temperature  
Gain error, unity gain buffer mode  
Input voltage range  
Rload = 1 k  
-
Vssa  
+0.1  
-
Vdda  
Vdda - 50  
-
mV  
Vo  
Output voltage range  
Output load = 1 mA  
Vssa + 50  
25  
-
mV  
Iout  
Output current  
Output voltage is between Vssa  
+500 mV and Vdda -500 mV, and  
Vdda > 2.7 V, -40°C Ta 85°C  
and Tj 100°C  
-
mA  
Output voltage is between Vssa  
+500 mV and Vdda -500 mV, and  
Vdda > 2.7 V, -40°C Ta 125°C  
and Tj 150°C  
20  
16  
-
-
-
-
mA  
mA  
Output current  
Output voltage is between Vssa  
+500 mV and Vdda -500 mV, and  
Vdda > 1.7 V and Vdda < 2.7 V  
Iout  
IDD  
Quiescent current  
Power mode = min  
Power mode = low  
Power mode = med  
Power mode = high  
250  
250  
330  
1000  
400  
400  
950  
2500  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
dB  
dB  
dB  
CMRR  
PSRR  
Common mode rejection ratio[29]  
Power supply rejection ratio  
80  
85  
70  
Vdda 2.7 V  
Vdda < 2.7 V  
Figure 11-16. Opamp Voffset Histogram, 3388 samples/847 parts, 25 °C, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 85 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-17. Opamp Voffset vs Temperature, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-18. Opamp Voffset vs Vcommon and Vdda, 25 °C  
Figure 11-19. Opamp Output Voltage vs Load Current and Temperature, High Power Mode, 25 °C, Vdda = 2.7 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 86 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-20. Opamp Operating Current vs Vdda and Power Mode  
Table 11-16. Opamp AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
GBW  
Gain-bandwidth product  
Power mode = minimum, 15 pF  
load  
1
MHz  
Power mode = low, 15 pF load  
Power mode = medium, 200 pF  
load  
2
1
MHz  
MHz  
Power mode = high, 200 pF load  
Power mode = low, 15 pF load  
Power mode = medium, 200 pF  
load  
Power mode = high, 200 pF load  
Power mode = high, Vdda = 5 V,  
at 100 kHz  
2.5  
1.1  
0.9  
MHz  
V/µs  
V/µs  
SR  
en  
Slew rate, 20% - 80%  
Input noise density  
3
45  
V/µs  
nV/sqrtH  
z
Figure 11-21. Opamp Noise vs Frequency, Power Mode = High, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 87 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-22. Opamp Step Response, Rising  
Figure 11-23. Opamp Step Response, Falling  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 88 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.2 Delta-Sigma ADC  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:  
Operation in continuous sample mode  
fclk = 6.144 MHz  
Reference = 1.024 V internal reference bypassed on P3.2 or P0.3  
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values  
Table 11-17. 12-bit Delta-sigma ADC DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
8
12  
bits  
No. of  
GPIO  
Number of channels, single ended  
Differential pair is formed using a  
pair of GPIOs.  
No. of  
GPIO/2  
Number of channels, differential  
Monotonic  
Yes  
Buffered, buffer gain = 1, Range =  
±1.024 V, 12-bit mode, 25 °C  
Ge  
Gd  
Gain error  
±0.2  
%
Buffered, buffer gain = 1, Range =  
±1.024 V, 12-bit mode  
Gain drift  
50  
ppm/°C  
mV  
Buffered, 16-bit mode, full voltage  
range  
±0.2  
±0.1  
Vos  
Input offset voltage  
Buffered, 16-bit mode,  
VDDA = 1.8 V + 5%  
mV  
Buffer gain = 1, 12-bit,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
TCVos  
Temperature coefficient, input offset voltage  
Input voltage range, single ended[35]  
1
µV/°C  
VSSA  
VSSA  
VDDA  
VDDA  
V
V
Input voltage range, differential unbuf-  
fered[35]  
Input voltage range, differential, buffered[35]  
Integral non linearity[35]  
Differential non linearity[35]  
Integral non linearity[35]  
VSSA  
VDDA – 1  
V
INL12  
DNL12  
INL8  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
±1  
±1  
±1  
±1  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
DNL8  
Differential non linearity[35]  
Note  
35. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 89 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-17. 12-bit Delta-sigma ADC DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
ADC input resistance  
Conditions  
Input buffer used  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Rin_Buff  
10  
M  
Input buffer bypassed, 12 bit,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
Rin_ADC12 ADC input resistance  
148[36]  
k  
Vextref  
ADC external reference input voltage  
Pins P0[3], P3[2]  
0.9  
1.3  
V
Current Consumption  
IDD_12  
IBUFF  
IDDD + IDDA Current consumption, 12 bit [37] 192 ksps, unbuffered  
Buffer current consumption[37]  
1.95  
2.5  
mA  
mA  
Notes  
36. By using switched capacitors at the ADC input an effective input resistance is created. Holding the gain and number of bits constant, the resistance is proportional  
to the inverse of the clock frequency. This value is calculated, not measured. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.  
37. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 90 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-18. Delta-sigma ADC AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
4
Units  
Samples  
%
Startup time  
Total harmonic distortion[37]  
THD  
Buffer gain = 1, 16 bit,  
Range = ±1.024 V  
0.0040  
12-Bit Resolution Mode  
SR12  
BW12  
Sample rate, continuous, high power[37]  
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[37]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
4
44  
192  
ksps  
kHz  
dB  
SINAD12int Signal to noise ratio, 12-bit, internal  
reference[37]  
66  
8-Bit Resolution Mode  
SR8  
Sample rate, continuous, high power[37]  
Input bandwidth at max sample rate[37]  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
Range = ±1.024 V, unbuffered  
8
88  
384  
ksps  
kHz  
dB  
BW8  
SINAD8int  
Signal to noise ratio, 8-bit, internal  
reference[37]  
43  
Table 11-19. Delta-sigma ADC Sample Rates, Range = ±1.024 V  
Continuous  
Multi-Sample  
Multi-Sample Turbo  
Resolution,  
Bits  
Min  
Max  
Min  
Max  
Min  
1829  
1489  
1307  
1123  
956  
Max  
8
8000  
6400  
5566  
4741  
4000  
384000  
307200  
267130  
227555  
192000  
1911  
1543  
1348  
1154  
978  
91701  
74024  
64673  
55351  
46900  
87771  
71441  
62693  
53894  
45850  
9
10  
11  
12  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 91 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-24. Delta-sigma ADC IDD vs sps, Range = ±1.024 V, Continuous Sample Mode, Input Buffer Bypassed  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 92 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.3 Voltage Reference  
Table 11-20. Voltage Reference Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C 1.021  
1.024  
1.027  
(+0.3%)  
V
(-0.3%)  
Vref [38]  
Precision reference  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C 1.018  
1.024  
1.030  
(+0.6%)  
V
(–0.6%)  
After typical PCB assembly, post reflow Typical (non-optimized) board  
layout and 250 °C solder reflow.  
Device may be calibrated after  
assembly to improve performance.  
–40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
±0.5  
±0.2  
±0.2  
%
%
%
Temperature drift[39]  
Box method  
30  
ppm/°C  
ppm/khr  
ppm  
Long term drift  
Thermal cycling drift (stability)[39, 40]  
100  
100  
Figure 11-25. Voltage Reference vs. Temperature and VCCA  
Figure 11-26. Voltage Reference Long-Term Drift  
Notes  
38. VREF is measured after packaging, and thus accounts for substrate and die attach stresses.  
39. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
40. After eight full cycles between –40 °C and 100 °C.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 93 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.4 Analog Globals  
Table 11-21. Analog Globals Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Rppag  
Resistance pin-to-pin through P2[4], VDDA = 3 V  
AGL0, DSM INP, AGL1, P2[5][41]  
1472  
2200  
Rppmuxbus Resistance pin-to-pin through P2[3], VDDA = 3 V  
amuxbusL, P2[4][41]  
706  
1100  
11.5.5 Comparator  
Table 11-22. Comparator DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Input offset voltage in fast mode  
Factory trim, Vdda > 2.7 V,  
Vin 0.5 V  
10  
mV  
Input offset voltage in slow mode  
Factory trim, Vin 0.5 V  
9
4
4
mV  
mV  
mV  
mV  
VOS  
Input offset voltage in fast mode[42] Custom trim  
Input offset voltage in slow mode[42] Custom trim  
Input offset voltage in ultra low-power VDDA 4.6 V  
±12  
mode  
VHYST  
VICM  
Hysteresis  
Hysteresis enable mode  
10  
32  
mV  
V
Input common mode voltage  
High current / fast mode  
Low current / slow mode  
Ultra low-power mode  
VSSA  
VSSA  
VSSA  
VDDA  
VDDA  
V
VDDA  
1.15  
V
VDDA 4.6 V  
CMRR  
Icmp  
Common mode rejection ratio  
High current mode/fast mode[29]  
-
50  
-
dB  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
VDDA < 4.6 V  
400  
600  
100  
150  
-
-
-
Low current mode/slow mode[29]  
Ultra low power mode[29]  
-
-
-
-
-
6
Table 11-23. Comparator AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Response time, high current mode[43] 50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin  
75  
110  
ns  
Response time, low current mode[43] 50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin  
155  
55  
200  
ns  
µs  
TRESP  
Response time, ultra low-power  
mode[43]  
50 mV overdrive, measured  
pin-to-pin, VDDA 4.6 V  
Note  
41. The resistance of the analog global and analog mux bus is high if VDDA 2.7 V, and the chip is in either sleep or hibernate mode. Use of analog global and analog  
mux bus under these conditions is not recommended.  
42. The recommended procedure for using a custom trim value for the on-chip comparators can be found in the TRM.  
43. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 94 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.6 IDAC  
All specifications are based on use of the low-resistance IDAC output pins (see Pin Descriptions on page 9 for details). See the IDAC  
component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications and APIs.  
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values.  
Table 11-24. IDAC (Current Digital-to-Analog Converter) DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Resolution  
IOUT  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
8
Max  
Units  
-
-
Output current at code = 255  
Range = 2.04 mA, code = 255,  
VDDA 2.7 V, Rload = 600   
2.04  
mA  
mA  
Range = 2.04 mA, high speed  
mode, code = 255, VDDA 2.7 V,  
Rload = 300   
2.04  
Range=255µA, code=255, Rload  
= 600   
255  
µA  
µA  
Range = 31.875 µA, code = 255,  
31.875  
Rload = 600   
Monotonicity  
Yes  
±1  
INL  
Integral nonlinearity  
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Codes  
8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 k, Cload =  
15 pF  
±0.9  
LSB  
LSB  
Source mode, range = 255 µA,  
Codes 8 – 255, Rload = 2.4 k,  
Cload = 15 pF  
±1.2  
±1.5  
DNL  
Differential nonlinearity  
Sink mode, range = 255 µA, Rload  
= 2.4 k, Cload = 15 pF  
±0.3  
±0.3  
±1  
±1  
LSB  
LSB  
Source mode, range = 255 µA,  
Rload = 2.4 k, Cload = 15 pF  
Ezs  
Eg  
Zero scale error  
Gain error  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Range = 2.04 mA, 25 °C  
-
0
-
±1  
±2  
LSB  
LSB  
%
-
1
±2.5  
±2.5  
±3.5  
0.04  
0.04  
0.05  
Range = 255 µA, 25 ° C  
%
Range = 31.875 µA, 25 ° C  
%
TC_Eg  
Temperature coefficient of gain error Range = 2.04 mA  
Range = 255 µA  
% / °C  
% / °C  
% / °C  
V
Range = 31.875 µA  
Vcompliance Dropout voltage, source or sink mode Voltage headroom at max current,  
Rload to Vdda or Rload to Vssa,  
Vdiff from Vdda  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 95 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-24. IDAC (Current Digital-to-Analog Converter) DC Specifications (continued)  
Parameter  
IDD  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Operating current, code = 0  
Low speed mode, source mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
44  
100  
µA  
Low speed mode, source mode,  
range = 255 µA,  
33  
33  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
500  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
Low speed mode, source mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
Low speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
36  
Low speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 255 µA  
33  
Low speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
33  
High speed mode, source mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
310  
305  
305  
310  
300  
300  
High speed mode, source mode,  
range = 255 µA  
High speed mode, source mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
High speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 31.875 µA  
High speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 255 µA  
High speed mode, sink mode,  
range = 2.04 mA  
Figure 11-27. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Source Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 96 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-28. IDAC INL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink Mode  
Figure 11-29. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Source Mode  
Figure 11-30. IDAC DNL vs Input Code, Range = 255 µA, Sink Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 97 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-31. IDAC INL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, High speed mode  
Figure 11-32. IDAC DNL vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, High speed mode  
Figure 11-33. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, Source Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 98 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-34. IDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, Sink Mode  
Figure 11-35. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Source Mode  
Figure 11-36. IDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, Range = 255 µA, Code = 0, Sink Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 99 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-25. IDAC (Current Digital-to-Analog Converter) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Fdac  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
8
Units  
Msps  
ns  
Update rate  
TSETTLE  
Settling time to 0.5 LSB  
Range = 31.875 µA or 255 µA, full  
scale transition, High speed mode,  
600 15-pF load  
125  
Current noise  
Range = 255 µA, source mode,  
High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V,  
10 kHz  
340  
pA/sqrtHz  
Figure 11-37. IDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0, 255 µA Mode, Source Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-38. IDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80, 255 µA Mode, Source Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 100 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-39. IDAC PSRR vs Frequency  
Figure 11-40. IDAC Current Noise, 255 µA Mode, Source Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 101 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.7 VDAC  
Table 11-26. VDAC (Voltage Digital-to-Analog Converter) DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
-
8
-
Output resistance[29]  
Rout  
Vout  
High  
Vout = 4 V  
Vout = 1 V  
1 V scale  
-
16  
4
-
k  
Low  
-
-
k  
Output voltage range, code = 255  
1.02  
4.08  
±2.1  
±0.3  
V
4 V scale, Vdda = 5 V  
1 V scale  
V
INL  
Integral nonlinearity  
Differential nonlinearity  
Monotonicity  
±2.5  
±1  
LSB  
DNL  
1 V scale  
LSB  
Yes  
±2.5  
±2.5  
0.03  
0.03  
100  
500  
±0.9  
Eg  
Gain error  
1 V scale,  
%
%
4 V scale  
TC_Eg  
Temperature coefficient, gain error  
1 V scale,  
%FSR / °C  
%FSR / °C  
µA  
4 V scale  
VDAC_ICC Operating current  
VOS Zero scale error  
Low speed mode  
High speed mode  
µA  
0
LSB  
Figure 11-41. VDAC INL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 102 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-42. VDAC DNL vs Input Code, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-43. VDAC INL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-44. VDAC DNL vs Temperature, 1 V Mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 103 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-45. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 1 V Mode  
Figure 11-46. VDAC Full Scale Error vs Temperature, 4 V Mode  
Figure 11-47. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1V Mode, Low speed mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 104 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-48. VDAC Operating Current vs Temperature, 1 V Mode, High speed mode  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 105 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-27. VDAC (Voltage Digital-to-Analog Converter) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Fdac  
Description  
Update rate[29]  
Update rate[29]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
1
Units  
Msps  
Ksps  
µs  
1 V mode  
4 V mode  
-
-
250  
1
TsettleP  
Settling time to 0.1%, step 25% to  
75%  
1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
1 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
4 V scale, Cload = 15 pF  
0.45  
0.8  
3.2  
1
µs  
TsettleN  
Settling time to 0.1%, step 75% to  
25%  
0.45  
0.7  
µs  
3
µs  
Voltage noise  
Range = 1 V, High speed mode,  
Vdda = 5 V, 10 kHz  
750  
nV/sqrtHz  
Figure 11-49. VDAC Step Response, Codes 0x40 - 0xC0, 1 V Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Figure 11-50. VDAC Glitch Response, Codes 0x7F - 0x80, 1 V Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 106 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-51. VDAC PSRR vs Frequency  
Figure 11-52. VDAC Voltage Noise, 1 V Mode, High speed mode, Vdda = 5 V  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 107 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.8 Discrete and Continuous Time Mixer  
The mixer is created using a SC/CT analog block; see the Mixer component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full electrical specifications  
and APIs.  
Table 11-28. Mixer DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VOS  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
15  
2
Units  
mV  
Quiescent current  
Gain  
0.9  
0
mA  
G
dB  
Table 11-29. Mixer AC Specifications  
Parameter  
fLO  
Description  
Local oscillator frequency  
Input signal frequency  
Local oscillator frequency  
Input signal frequency  
Slew rate  
Conditions  
Down mixer mode  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
4
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
V/µs  
fin  
fLO  
fin  
Down mixer mode  
Up mixer mode  
Up mixer mode  
14  
1
1
SR  
3
Note  
44. Bandwidth is guaranteed for input common mode between 0.3 V and Vdda-1.2 V and for output that is between 0.05 V and Vdda-0.05 V.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 108 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.9 Transimpedance Amplifier  
The TIA is created using a SC/CT Analog Block, see the TIA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full AC/DC specifications,  
and APIs and example code.  
Table 11-30. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vioff  
Description  
Input offset voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
-
-
10  
mV  
Conversion resistance[45]  
R = 20K  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
40 pF load  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-25  
-
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
+35  
2
%
%
R = 30K  
-
R = 40K  
-
%
Rconv  
R = 80K  
-
%
R = 120K  
-
%
R = 250K  
-
-
%
R= 500K  
%
R = 1M  
-
%
Quiescent current  
1.1  
mA  
Table 11-31. Transimpedance Amplifier (TIA) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
BW  
Description  
Conditions  
R = 20K; –40 pF load  
R = 120K; –40 pF load  
R = 1M; –40 pF load  
Min  
1000  
220  
25  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
kHz  
Input bandwidth (–3 dB)  
kHz  
kHz  
Note  
45. Conversion resistance values are not calibrated. Calibrated values and details about calibration are provided in PSoC Creator component data sheets. External  
precision resistors can also be used.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 109 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.10 Programmable Gain Amplifier  
The PGA is created using a SC/CT Analog Block, see the PGA component data sheet in PSoC Creator for full AC/DC specifications,  
and APIs and example code.  
Unless otherwise specified, operating conditions are:  
Operating temperature = 25 °C for typical values  
Unless otherwise specified, all charts and graphs show typical values  
Table 11-32. PGA DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Vin  
Description  
Input voltage range  
Conditions  
Min  
Vssa  
Typ  
Max  
Vdda  
10  
Units  
V
Power mode = minimum  
Vos  
Input offset voltage  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1  
mV  
Gain Error[29]  
Non inverting mode, reference = Vssa  
Ge1  
Gain = 1  
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 85°C and  
Tj 100°C  
±0.15  
±0.15  
±2.5  
±4  
%
%
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 125°C and  
Tj 150°C  
Ge16  
Ge50  
TCVos  
Gain = 16  
Gain = 50  
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 85°C and  
Tj 100°C  
%
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 125°C and  
Tj 150°C  
%
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 85°C and  
Tj 100°C  
±5  
%
Rin of 40K, -40°C Ta 125°C and  
Tj 150°C  
±6  
%
Input offset voltage drift with  
temperature  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1  
±30  
µV/°C  
Vonl  
Cin  
DC output nonlinearity  
Input capacitance  
Gain = 1  
±0.01  
% of FSR  
7
pF  
V
Voh  
Output voltage swing  
Power mode = high,  
VDDA –  
gain = 1, Rload = 100 kto VDDA / 2 0.15  
Vol  
Output voltage swing  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, Rload = 100 kto VDDA / 2  
VSSA  
0.15  
+
V
Vsrc  
Output voltage under load  
Iload = 250 µA, Vdda 2.7V, power  
mode = high  
300  
mV  
Idd  
Operating current  
Power mode = high  
1.5  
1.65  
mA  
dB  
PSRR  
Power supply rejection ratio  
48  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 110 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-53. PGA Voffset Histogram, 4096 samples / 1024 parts  
Table 11-33. PGA AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
BW1 –3 dB bandwidth  
Conditions  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, input = 100 mV  
peak-to-peak, Cl = 40 pF  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
5.5  
8
MHz  
SR1  
en  
Slew rate  
Power mode = high,  
gain = 1, 20% to 80%  
3
V/µs  
Input noise density  
Power mode = high,  
Vdda = 5 V, at 100 kHz  
43  
nV/sqrtHz  
Figure 11-54. Noise vs. Frequency, Vdda = 5 V, Power Mode = High  
11.5.11 Temperature Sensor  
Table 11-34. Temperature Sensor Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Temp sensor accuracy  
Range: –40 °C to +150 °C  
-
±5  
-
°C  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 111 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.5.12 LCD Direct Drive  
Table 11-35. LCD Direct Drive DC Specifications  
Parameter  
ICC  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
LCD system operating current  
Device sleep mode with wakeup at  
400-Hz rate to refresh LCDs, bus  
clock = 3 Mhz, Vddio = Vdda = 3 V,  
4 commons, 16 segments, 1/4 duty  
cycle, 50 Hz frame rate, no glass  
connected  
38  
A  
ICC_SEG  
VBIAS  
Current per segment driver  
Strong drive mode  
2
260  
5
µA  
V
LCD bias range (VBIAS refers to the VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS  
main output voltage(V0) of LCD DAC)  
LCD bias step size  
VDDA 3 V and VDDA VBIAS  
9.1 ×  
VDDA  
mV  
pF  
LCD capacitance per  
Drivers may be combined  
500  
5000  
segment/common driver  
Long term segment offset  
20  
mV  
µA  
IOUT  
Output drive current per segment  
driver)  
Vddio = 5.5V, strong drive mode  
355  
710  
Table 11-36. LCD Direct Drive AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
LCD frame rate  
Conditions  
Min  
10  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
fLCD  
50  
150  
Hz  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 112 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.6 Digital Peripherals  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.6.1 Timer  
Table 11-37. Timer DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16-bit timer, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
50 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-38. Timer AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
DC  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
Typ  
Max  
67 [46]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50  
-
Capture pulse width (Internal)  
Capture pulse width (external)  
Timer resolution  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Enable pulse width  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Reset pulse width (external)  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Note  
46. Applicable at -40°C to 85°C; 50 MHz at -40°C to 125°C.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 113 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.6.2 Counter  
Table 11-39. Counter DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16-bit counter, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
50 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-40. Counter AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
DC  
15  
21  
15  
21  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
Typ  
Max  
67[47]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50  
-
Capture pulse  
-
ns  
Resolution  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Pulse width  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Pulse width (external)  
Enable pulse width  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
Reset pulse width (external)  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Note  
47. Applicable at -40°C to 85°C; 50 MHz at -40°C to 125°C.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 114 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.6.3 Pulse Width Modulation  
Table 11-41. PWM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Block current consumption  
16-bit PWM, at listed input clock  
frequency  
µA  
3 MHz  
15  
60  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
12 MHz  
50 MHz  
67 MHz  
260  
350  
Table 11-42. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Operating frequency  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
DC  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
15  
21  
30  
42  
Typ  
Max  
67 [48]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50  
-
Pulse width  
-
ns  
Pulse width (external)  
Kill pulse width  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
-
ns  
Kill pulse width (external)  
Enable pulse width  
ns  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ns  
ns  
ns  
Enable pulse width (external)  
Reset pulse width  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Reset pulse width (external)  
ns  
ns  
Note  
48. Applicable at -40°C to 85°C; 50 MHz at -40°C to 125°C.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 115 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.6.4 I2C  
Table 11-43. Fixed I2C DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
250  
260  
30  
Units  
µA  
Block current consumption  
Enabled, configured for 100 kbps  
Enabled, configured for 400 kbps  
Wake from sleep mode  
µA  
µA  
Table 11-44. Fixed I2C AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Bit rate  
-
-
1
Mbps  
11.6.5 Controller Area Network[49]  
Table 11-45. CAN DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
500 kbps  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
285  
330  
Units  
µA  
Block current consumption  
-
-
-
-
1 Mbps  
µA  
Table 11-46. CAN AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Bit rate  
Minimum 8 MHz clock  
-
-
1
Mbit  
11.6.6 Digital Filter Block  
Table 11-47. DFB DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
64-tap FIR at Fdfb  
500 kHz (6.7 ksps)  
1 MHz (13.4 ksps)  
10 MHz (134 ksps)  
50 MHz (644 ksps)  
67 MHz (900 ksps)[50]  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
DFB operating current  
-
-
-
-
-
0.16  
0.33  
3.3  
0.27  
0.53  
5.3  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
15.7  
21.8  
25.5  
35.6  
Table 11-48. DFB AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Fdfb  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
DC  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
DFB operating frequency  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
-
67 [50]  
50 [50]  
Note  
49. Refer to ISO 11898 specification for details.  
50. Applicable at -40°C to 85°C; 50 MHz at -40°C to 125°C.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 116 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.6.7 USB  
Table 11-49. USB DC Specifications  
Parameter  
VUSB_5  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Device supply for USB operation  
USB configured, USB regulator  
enabled  
4.35  
5.25  
V
VUSB_3.3  
VUSB_3  
USB configured, USB regulator  
bypassed  
3.15  
2.85  
3.6  
3.6  
V
V
USB configured, USB regulator  
bypassed[51]  
IUSB_Configured Device supply current in device  
active mode, bus clock and IMO =  
24 MHz  
VDDD = 5 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz  
10  
8
mA  
mA  
VDDD = 3.3 V, FCPU = 1.5 MHz  
IUSB_Suspended Device supply current in device  
sleep mode  
VDDD = 5 V, connected to USB  
host, PICU configured to wake on  
USB resume signal  
0.5  
mA  
V
DDD = 5 V, disconnected from  
0.3  
0.5  
mA  
mA  
USB host  
VDDD = 3.3 V, connected to USB  
host, PICU configured to wake on  
USB resume signal  
VDDD = 3.3 V, disconnected from  
0.3  
mA  
USB host  
11.6.8 Universal Digital Blocks (UDBs)  
PSoC Creator provides a library of pre-built and tested standard digital peripherals (UART, SPI, LIN, PRS, CRC, timer, counter, PWM,  
AND, OR, and so on) that are mapped to the UDB array. See the component data sheets in PSoC Creator for full AC/DC specifications,  
APIs, and example code.  
Table 11-50. UDB AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Datapath Performance  
Fmax_timer Maximum frequency of 16-bit timer in a -40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
67  
50  
67  
50  
67  
50  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
UDB pair  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Fmax_adder Maximum frequency of 16-bit adder in a -40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
UDB pair  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Fmax_CRC Maximum frequency of 16-bit CRC/PRS -40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
in a UDB pair  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
PLD Performance  
Fmax_PLD Maximum frequency of a two-pass PLD -40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-
-
-
-
67  
50  
MHz  
MHz  
function in a UDB pair  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Clock to Output Performance  
tclk_out  
Propogation delay for clock in to data out, 25 °C, Vddd 2.7 V  
-
-
20  
25  
55  
ns  
ns  
see Figure 11-55.  
tclk_out  
Propogation delay for clock in to data out, Worst-case placement, routing,  
see Figure 11-55.  
and pin selection  
Note  
51. Rise/fall time matching (TR) not guaranteed, see .  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 117 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-55. Clock to Output Performance  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 118 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.7 Memory  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.7.1 Flash  
Table 11-51. Flash DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
Vddd pin  
1.71  
-
5.5  
V
Table 11-52. Flash AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
15  
15  
10  
10  
5
Units  
ms  
Twrite  
Block write time (erase + program)  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 140°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 140°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 140°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 140°C  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 140°C  
No overhead [53]  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ms  
Terase  
Tbulk  
Block erase time  
ms  
ms  
Block program time  
ms  
5
ms  
Bulk erase time (16 KB to 64 KB)[52]  
Sector erase time (8 KB to 16 KB)[52]  
35  
TBD  
15  
15  
5
ms  
ms  
ms  
ms  
Total device program time  
(including JTAG, etc.)  
seconds  
Flash data retention time,  
retention period measured from last  
erase cycle [54]  
Average ambient temp.  
TA 55 °C, 100 K erase/program  
cycles  
20  
10  
years  
Retention period measured from  
last erase cycle after 100k  
progra/erase cycles at  
TA 85 °C  
Notes  
52. ECC not included.  
53. See PSoC® 3 Device Programming Specifications for a description of a low-overhead method of programming PSoC 3 flash. (Please take care of Foot note numbers)  
54. Cypress provides a retention calculator to calculate the retention lifetime based on customers' individual temperature profiles for operation over the –40 °C to +125 °C  
ambient temperature range. Contact customercare@cypress.com.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 119 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.7.2 EEPROM  
Table 11-53. EEPROM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
1.71  
-
5.5  
V
Table 11-54. EEPROM AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Min  
Typ  
2
Max  
20  
Units  
ms  
TWRITE  
Single row erase/write cycle time  
EEPROM data retention time, retention Average ambient temp, TA 25 °C,  
period measured from last erase cycle 1M erase/program cycles  
20  
years  
Average ambient temp, TA 55 °C,  
20  
10  
100 K erase/program cycles  
Average ambient temp. TA 85 °C,  
10 K erase/program cycles  
11.7.3 Nonvolatile Latches (NVL)  
Table 11-55. NVL DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Erase and program voltage  
Vddd pin  
1.71  
-
5.5  
V
Table 11-56. NVL AC Specifications  
Parameter Description  
NVL endurance  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Programmed at 25°C  
Programmed at 0-70°C  
1K  
-
-
program/  
erase  
cycles  
100  
-
-
program/  
erase  
cycles  
NVL data retention time  
Programmed at 55°C  
Programmed at 0-70°C  
20  
10  
-
-
-
-
years  
years  
11.7.4 SRAM  
Table 11-57. SRAM DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Vsram  
SRAM retention voltage  
1.2  
-
-
V
Table 11-58. SRAM AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
DC  
DC  
Typ  
Max  
67  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
Fsram  
SRAM operating frequency  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
-
50  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 120 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.7.5 External Memory Interface  
Figure 11-56. Asynchronous Read Cycle Timing  
Tcel  
EM_CEn  
EM_Addr  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
Address  
Toel  
EM_OEn  
EM_WEn  
EM_Data  
Tdoesu  
Tdoeh  
Data  
Table 11-59. Asynchronous Read Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock period[55]  
Conditions  
Vdda  3.3 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
30.3  
2T – 5  
Tcel  
EM_CEn low time  
2T+ 5  
ns  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
Toel  
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid  
Address hold time after EM_Wen high  
EM_OEn low time  
5
ns  
T
ns  
2T – 5  
T + 15  
3
2T + 5  
ns  
Tdoesu  
Tdoeh  
Data to EM_OEn high setup time  
Data hold time after EM_OEn high  
ns  
ns  
Note  
55. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see .  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 121 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-57. Asynchronous Write Cycle Timing  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
EM_Addr  
EM_CEn  
Address  
Tcel  
Twel  
EM_WEn  
EM_OEn  
Tdweh  
Tdcev  
EM_Data  
Data  
Table 11-60. Asynchronous Write Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock period[55]  
Conditions  
Min  
30.3  
T – 5  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Tcel  
EM_CEn low time  
T + 5  
ns  
Taddrv  
Taddrh  
Twel  
EM_CEn low to EM_Addr valid  
Address hold time after EM_WEn high  
EM_WEn low time  
5
ns  
T
ns  
T – 5  
T + 5  
7
ns  
Tdcev  
Tdweh  
EM_CEn low to data valid  
Data hold time after EM_WEn high  
ns  
T
ns  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 122 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-58. Synchronous Read Cycle Timing  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock  
EM_CEn  
Tceld  
Taddrv  
Toeld  
Tcehd  
Taddriv  
EM_Addr  
EM_OEn  
Address  
Toehd  
Tds  
Data  
EM_Data  
Tadschd  
Tadscld  
EM_ ADSCn  
Table 11-61. Synchronous Read Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock period[56]  
Conditions  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Min  
30.3  
T/2  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock pulse high  
ns  
Tceld  
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high  
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid  
EM_OEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_OEn high  
Data valid before EM_OEn high  
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high  
5
ns  
Tcehd  
Taddrv  
Taddriv  
Toeld  
T/2 – 5  
5
ns  
ns  
T/2 – 5  
5
ns  
ns  
Toehd  
Tds  
T
ns  
T + 15  
5
ns  
Tadscld  
Tadschd  
ns  
T/2 – 5  
ns  
Note  
56. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see .  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 123 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-59. Synchronous Write Cycle Timing  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock  
EM_CEn  
Tceld  
Taddrv  
Tweld  
Tds  
Tcehd  
Taddriv  
EM_Addr  
Address  
Twehd  
EM_WEn  
EM_Data  
Tdh  
Data  
Tadschd  
Tadscld  
EM_ ADSCn  
Table 11-62. Synchronous Write Cycle Specifications  
Parameter  
T
Description  
EMIF clock Period[57]  
Conditions  
Vdda 3.3 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
30.3  
Tcp/2  
EM_Clock pulse high  
T/2  
ns  
Tceld  
EM_CEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_CEn high  
EM_Addr valid to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_Addr invalid  
EM_WEn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_WEn high  
Data valid before EM_Clock high  
Data invalid after EM_Clock high  
EM_ADSCn low to EM_Clock high  
EM_Clock high to EM_ADSCn high  
5
ns  
Tcehd  
Taddrv  
Taddriv  
Tweld  
Twehd  
Tds  
T/2 – 5  
ns  
5
ns  
T/2 – 5  
ns  
5
ns  
T/2 – 5  
ns  
5
ns  
Tdh  
T
5
ns  
Tadscld  
Tadschd  
ns  
T/2 – 5  
ns  
Note  
57. Limited by GPIO output frequency, see .  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 124 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.8 PSoC System Resources  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.8.1 POR with Brown Out  
For brown out detect in regulated mode, Vddd and Vdda must be 2.0 V. Brown out detect is available in externally regulated mode.  
Table 11-63. Precise Power On Reset (PRES) with Brown Out DC Specifications  
Parameter  
PRESR  
Description  
Rising trip voltage  
Falling trip voltage  
Conditions  
Factory trim  
Min  
1.64  
1.62  
Typ  
Max  
1.68  
1.66  
Units  
V
V
PRESF  
Table 11-64. Precise Power On Reset (PRES) with Brown Out AC Specifications  
Parameter  
PRES_TR Response time  
VDDD/VDDA droop rate  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
0.5  
Units  
µs  
Sleep mode  
5
V/sec  
11.8.2 Voltage Monitors  
Table 11-65. Voltage Monitors DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
LVI  
Trip voltage  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0000b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0001b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0010b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0011b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0100b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0101b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0110b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 0111b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1000b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1001b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1010b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1011b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1100b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1101b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1110b  
LVI_A/D_SEL[3:0] = 1111b  
Trip voltage  
1.68  
1.89  
2.14  
2.38  
2.62  
2.87  
3.11  
3.35  
3.59  
3.84  
4.08  
4.32  
4.56  
4.83  
5.05  
5.30  
5.57  
1.73  
1.95  
2.20  
2.45  
2.71  
2.95  
3.21  
3.46  
3.70  
3.95  
4.20  
4.45  
4.70  
4.98  
5.21  
5.47  
5.75  
1.77  
2.01  
2.27  
2.53  
2.79  
3.04  
3.31  
3.56  
3.81  
4.07  
4.33  
4.59  
4.84  
5.13  
5.37  
5.63  
5.92  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
HVI  
Table 11-66. Voltage Monitors AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Response time[58]  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
1
µs  
Note  
58. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 125 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.8.3 Interrupt Controller  
Table 11-67. Interrupt Controller AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Delay from Interrupt signal input to ISR Includes worse case completion of  
-
-
25  
Tcy CPU  
code execution from ISR code  
longest instruction DIV with 6  
cycles  
11.8.4 JTAG Interface  
Table 11-68. JTAG Interface AC Specifications[29]  
Parameter  
f_TCK  
Description  
TCK frequency  
Conditions  
3.3 V VDDD 5 V  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
ns  
14[59]  
7[59]  
T_TDI_setup  
TDI setup before TCK high  
(T/10) –  
5
T_TMS_setup TMS setup before TCK high  
T/4  
T/4  
T_TDI_hold  
T_TDO_valid  
T_TDO_hold  
TDI, TMS hold after TCK high  
TCK low to TDO valid  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
T = 1/f_TCK max  
2T/5  
TDO hold after TCK high  
T/4  
Figure 11-60. JTAG Interface Timing  
(1/f_TCK)  
TCK  
T_TDI_setup  
T_TDI_hold  
TDI  
T_TDO_hold  
T_TDO_valid  
TDO  
T_TMS_setup  
T_TMS_hold  
TMS  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 126 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.8.5 SWD Interface  
Table 11-69. SWD Interface AC Specifications[29]  
Parameter  
Description  
SWDCLK frequency  
Conditions  
3.3 V VDDD 5 V  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V  
1.71 V VDDD < 3.3 V,  
SWD over USBIO pins  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
14[60]  
7[60]  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
f_SWDCK  
5.5[60]  
T_SWDI_setup SWDIO input setup before SWDCK high T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
T/4  
T/4  
T_SWDI_hold SWDIO input hold after SWDCK high  
T_SWDO_valid SWDCK high to SWDIO output  
T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
T = 1/f_SWDCK max  
2T/5  
Figure 11-61. SWD Interface Timing  
(1/f_SWDCK)  
SWDCK  
T_SWDI_setup  
T_SWDI_hold  
SWDIO  
(PSoC input)  
T_SWDO_valid  
T_SWDO_hold  
SWDIO  
(PSoC output)  
11.8.6 SWV Interface  
Table 11-70. SWV Interface AC Specifications  
[29]  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
33  
Units  
SWV mode SWV bit rate  
-
-
Mbit  
Notes  
59. f_TCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.  
60. f_SWDCK must also be no more than 1/3 CPU clock frequency.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 127 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.9 Clocking  
Specifications are valid for -40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C, except where noted. Specifications are valid for 1.71 V to 5.5 V, except  
where noted.  
11.9.1 Internal Main Oscillator  
Table 11-71. IMO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Supply current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
62.6 MHz  
600  
500  
500  
300  
200  
180  
150  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
µA  
48 MHz  
24 MHz – USB mode  
24 MHz – non USB mode  
12 MHz  
With oscillator locking to USB bus  
6 MHz  
3 MHz  
Figure 11-62. IMO Current vs. Frequency  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 128 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 11-72. IMO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
IMO frequency stability (with factory trim)  
62.6 MHz  
–7  
–5  
7
5
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
48 MHz  
24 MHz – Non USB mode  
24 MHz – USB mode  
12 MHz  
–4  
4
[61]  
F
IMO  
With oscillator locking to USB bus  
–0.25  
–3  
0.25  
3
6 MHz  
–2  
2
3 MHz  
–2  
2
3 MHz frequency stability after typical Typical (non-optimized) board  
-
±2  
-
PCB assembly post-reflow.  
layout and 250 °C solder reflow.  
Device may be calibrated after  
assembly to improve performance.  
[62]  
Startup time  
Fromenable(duringnormalsystem  
operation)  
13  
µs  
[62]  
Jitter (peak to peak)  
Jp–p  
F = 24 MHz  
F = 3 MHz  
0.9  
1.6  
ns  
ns  
[62]  
Jitter (long term)  
Jperiod  
F = 24 MHz  
F = 3 MHz  
0.9  
12  
ns  
ns  
Notes  
61. FIMO is measured after packaging, and thus accounts for substrate and die attach stresses.  
62. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 129 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 11-63. IMO Frequency Variation vs. Temperature  
Figure 11-64. IMO Frequency Variation vs. VCC  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 130 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.9.2 Internal Low Speed Oscillator  
Table 11-73. ILO DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
= 1 kHz  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
1.7  
2.6  
2.6  
15  
Units  
µA  
[63]  
Operating current  
F
F
F
-
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
I
= 33 kHz  
µA  
CC  
= 100 kHz  
µA  
[63]  
[63]  
Leakage current  
Leakage current  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
Power down mode  
2.0  
nA  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
Power down mode  
-
-
200  
nA  
Table 11-74. ILO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Turbo mode  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Startup time  
-
-
2
ms  
ILO frequencies (trimmed)  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
100 kHz  
45  
100  
1
200  
2
kHz  
kHz  
1 kHz  
0.5  
Filo  
ILO frequencies (untrimmed)  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
100 kHz  
30  
100  
1
300  
3.5  
kHz  
kHz  
1 kHz  
0.3  
ILO frequencies (trimmed)  
100 kHz  
45  
-
-
450  
5
kHz  
kHz  
1 kHz  
0.5  
Filo  
ILO frequencies (untrimmed)  
100 kHz  
1 kHz  
150  
0.3  
-
-
500  
6.5  
kHz  
kHz  
Figure 11-65. ILO Frequency Variation vs. VDD  
Note  
63. This value is calculated, not measured.  
64. Based on device characterization (Not production tested).  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 131 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
11.9.3 External Crystal Oscillator  
[65]  
Table 11-75. 32 kHz External Crystal DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Operating current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Icc  
Low power mode; C = 6 pF;  
0.25  
1.0  
µA  
L
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
DL  
Drive level  
Low-power mode; C = 6 pF  
1
µW  
L
Table 11-76. 32 kHz External Crystal AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
32.768  
1
Max  
Units  
kHz  
s
F
Frequency  
Ton  
Startup time  
High power mode  
Table 11-77. MHz ECO AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
F
Crystal frequency range  
4
25  
MHz  
11.9.4 External Clock Reference  
Table 11-78. External Clock Reference AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
External frequency range  
Input duty cycle range  
Input edge rate  
Min  
0
Typ  
Max  
33  
70  
Units  
MHz  
%
Measured at V  
/2  
30  
50  
DDIO  
V
to V  
0.51  
V/ns  
IL  
IH  
11.9.5 Phase-Locked Loop  
Table 11-79. PLL DC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
PLL operating current  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
400  
200  
Max  
Units  
µA  
I
In = 3 MHz, Out = 67 MHz  
In = 3 MHz, Out = 24 MHz  
DD  
µA  
Table 11-80. PLL AC Specifications  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
48  
Units  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
µs  
[66]  
Fpllin  
PLL input frequency  
Output of Prescalar  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[67]  
PLL intermediate frequency  
1
3
[66]  
Fpllout  
PLL output frequency  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
24  
24  
-
67  
50  
Lock time at startup  
250  
250  
400  
[29]  
Jperiod-rms Jitter (rms)  
-40°C Ta 85°C and Tj 100°C  
-40°C Ta 125°C and Tj 150°C  
-
ps  
-
ps  
Notes  
65. Based on device characterization (not production tested).  
66. This specification is guaranteed by testing the PLL across the specified range using the IMO as the source for the PLL.  
67. PLL input divider, Q, must be set so that the input frequency is divided down to the intermediate frequency range. Value for Q ranges from 1 to 16.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 132 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
12. Ordering Information  
In addition to the features listed in Table 12-1, every CY8C36 device includes: a precision on-chip voltage reference, precision  
2
oscillators, Flash, ECC, DMA, a fixed function I C, 4 KB trace RAM, JTAG/SWD programming and debug, external memory interface,  
and more. In addition to these features, the flexible UDBs and Analog Subsection support a wide range of peripherals. To assist you  
in selecting the ideal part, PSoC Creator makes a part recommendation after you choose the components required by your application.  
All CY8C36 derivatives incorporate device and Flash security in user-selectable security levels; see TRM for details.  
Table 12-1. CY8C36 Family with Single Cycle 8051  
[69]  
MCU Core  
Analog  
Digital  
I/O  
Part Number  
Package JTAG ID[70]  
32 KB Flash  
CY8C3645AXE-169 50 32  
CY8C3665AXA-010 67 32  
CY8C3665AXA-016 67 32  
CY8C3665PVA-007 67 32  
CY8C3665PVA-008 67 32  
CY8C3665PVA-080 67 32  
64 KB Flash  
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
4
4
4
4
4
4
-
-
-
72 62  
70 62  
72 62  
31 25  
29 25  
29 25  
8
8
8
4
4
4
2
0
2
2
0
0
100-TQFP 0x1E0A9069  
100-TQFP 0x1E00A069  
100-TQFP 0x1E010069  
48-SSOP 0x1E007069  
48-SSOP 0x1E008069  
48-SSOP 0x1E050069  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CY8C3646AXE-170 50 64  
CY8C3646AXE-178 50 64  
CY8C3646PVE-171 50 64  
CY8C3646PVE-179 50 64  
CY8C3666AXA-036 67 64  
CY8C3666AXA-037 67 64  
CY8C3666AXA-052 67 64  
CY8C3666PVA-022 67 64  
CY8C3666PVA-026 67 64  
CY8C3666PVA-180 67 64  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
-
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
12-bit Del-Sig  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
2
2
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
-
-
-
-
70 62  
70 62  
29 25  
29 25  
72 62  
70 62  
70 62  
31 25  
29 25  
29 25  
8
8
4
4
8
8
8
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
100-TQFP 0x1E0AA069  
100-TQFP 0x1E0B2069  
48-SSOP 0x1E0AB069  
48-SSOP 0x1E0B3069  
100-TQFP 0x1E024069  
100-TQFP 0x1E025069  
100-TQFP 0x1E034069  
48-SSOP 0x1E016069  
48-SSOP 0x1E01A069  
48-SSOP 0x1E0B4069  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Notes  
68. UDBs support a wide variety of functionality including SPI, LIN, UART, timer, counter, PWM, PRS, and others. Individual functions may use a fraction of a UDB or  
multiple UDBs. Multiple functions can share a single UDB. See the “Example Peripherals” section on page 40 for more information on how UDBs may be used.  
69. The I/O Count includes all types of digital I/O: GPIO, SIO, and the two USB I/O. See the ““I/O System and Routing” section on page 33” for details on the functionality  
of each of these types of I/O.  
70. The JTAG ID has three major fields. The most significant nibble (left digit) is the version, followed by a 2 byte part number and a 3 nibble manufacturer ID.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 133 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
12.1 Part Numbering Conventions  
PSoC 3 devices follow the part numbering convention described below. All fields are single character alphanumeric (0, 1, 2, …, 9, A,  
B, …, Z) unless stated otherwise.  
CY8Cabcdefg-xxx  
a: Architecture  
3: PSoC 3  
5: PSoC 5  
ef: Package Code  
Two character alphanumeric  
AX: TQFP  
LT: QFN  
PV: SSOP  
b: Family Group within Architecture  
2: CY8C32 family  
g: Temperature Range  
4: CY8C34 family  
6: CY8C36 family  
8: CY8C38 family  
C: commercial 0°C to 70°C  
I: industrial -40°C to 85°C  
A: automotive -40°C to 85°C  
E: extended -40°C to 125°C  
c: Speed Grade  
4: 50 MHz  
xxx: Peripheral Set  
6: 67 MHz  
Three character numeric  
No meaning is associated with these three characters.  
d: Flash Capacity  
4: 16 KB  
5: 32 KB  
6: 64 KB  
CY8C  
3
6
6
6
P
V
A
-
x x x  
Example  
Cypress Prefix  
Architecture  
3: PSoC3  
6: CY8C36 Family  
6: 67 MHz  
Family Group within Architecture  
Speed Grade  
6: 64 KB  
Flash Capacity  
PV: SSOP  
Package Code  
A: Automotive  
Temperature Range  
Peripheral Set  
All devices in the PSoC 3 CY8C36 family comply to RoHS-6 specifications, demonstrating the commitment by Cypress to lead-free  
products. Lead (Pb) is an alloying element in solders that has resulted in environmental concerns due to potential toxicity. Cypress  
uses nickel-palladium-gold (NiPdAu) technology for the majority of leadframe-based packages.  
A high level review of the Cypress Pb-free position is available on our website. Specific package information is also available. Package  
Material Declaration Datasheets (PMDDs) identify all substances contained within Cypress packages. PMDDs also confirm the  
absence of many banned substances. The information in the PMDDs will help Cypress customers plan for recycling or other "end of  
life" requirements.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 134 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
13. Packaging  
Table 13-1. Package Characteristics  
Parameter  
Description  
Conditions  
Min  
–40  
–40  
Typ  
25.00  
Max  
125  
150  
Units  
°C  
T
Operating ambient temperature  
Operating junction temperature  
A
T
T
T
T
T
°C  
J
Package (48-pin SSOP)  
49  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
°C/W  
JA  
JA  
JC  
JC  
JA  
Package (100-pin TQFP)  
34  
JA  
Package (48-pin SSOP)  
24  
JC  
Package (100-pin TQFP)  
10  
JC  
Table 13-2. Solder Reflow Peak Temperature  
Maximum Peak  
Package  
Maximum Time at Peak  
Temperature  
Temperature  
48-pin SSOP  
100-pin TQFP  
260 °C  
260 °C  
30 seconds  
30 seconds  
Table 13-3. Package Moisture Sensitivity Level (MSL), IPC/JEDEC J-STD-2  
Package  
MSL  
48-pin SSOP  
100-pin TQFP  
MSL 3  
MSL 3  
Figure 13-1. 48-pin (300 mil) SSOP Package Outline  
51-85061 *F  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 135 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Figure 13-2. 100-pin TQFP (14 × 14 × 1.4 mm) Package Outline  
51-85048 *I  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 136 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
14. Acronyms  
Acronym  
FIR  
Description  
finite impulse response, see also IIR  
flash patch and breakpoint  
full-speed  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document  
Acronym  
abus  
Description  
FPB  
FS  
analog local bus  
ADC  
AG  
analog-to-digital converter  
analog global  
GPIO  
general-purpose input/output, applies to a PSoC  
pin  
AHB  
AMBA (advanced microcontroller bus archi-  
tecture) high-performance bus, an ARM data  
transfer bus  
HVI  
IC  
high-voltage interrupt, see also LVI, LVD  
integrated circuit  
ALU  
arithmetic logic unit  
IDAC  
IDE  
current DAC, see also DAC, VDAC  
integrated development environment  
AMUXBUS analog multiplexer bus  
2
API  
application programming interface  
I C, or IIC  
Inter-Integrated Circuit, a communications  
protocol  
APSR  
application program status register  
advanced RISC machine, a CPU architecture  
automatic thump mode  
IIR  
infinite impulse response, see also FIR  
internal low-speed oscillator, see also IMO  
internal main oscillator, see also ILO  
integral nonlinearity, see also DNL  
input/output, see also GPIO, DIO, SIO, USBIO  
initial power-on reset  
®
ARM  
ILO  
IMO  
INL  
ATM  
BW  
bandwidth  
CAN  
Controller Area Network, a communications  
protocol  
I/O  
CMRR  
CPU  
common-mode rejection ratio  
central processing unit  
IPOR  
IPSR  
IRQ  
ITM  
LCD  
LIN  
interrupt program status register  
interrupt request  
CRC  
cyclic redundancy check, an error-checking  
protocol  
instrumentation trace macrocell  
liquid crystal display  
DAC  
DFB  
DIO  
digital-to-analog converter, see also IDAC, VDAC  
digital filter block  
Local Interconnect Network, a communications  
protocol.  
digital input/output, GPIO with only digital  
capabilities, no analog. See GPIO.  
LR  
link register  
DMA  
DNL  
direct memory access, see also TD  
differential nonlinearity, see also INL  
do not use  
LUT  
LVD  
LVI  
lookup table  
low-voltage detect, see also LVI  
low-voltage interrupt, see also HVI  
low-voltage transistor-transistor logic  
multiply-accumulate  
DNU  
DR  
port write data registers  
digital system interconnect  
data watchpoint and trace  
error correcting code  
LVTTL  
MAC  
MCU  
MISO  
NC  
DSI  
DWT  
ECC  
ECO  
EEPROM  
microcontroller unit  
master-in slave-out  
external crystal oscillator  
no connect  
electrically erasable programmable read-only  
memory  
NMI  
nonmaskable interrupt  
non-return-to-zero  
NRZ  
NVIC  
NVL  
opamp  
PAL  
EMI  
electromagnetic interference  
external memory interface  
end of conversion  
nested vectored interrupt controller  
nonvolatile latch, see also WOL  
operational amplifier  
EMIF  
EOC  
EOF  
EPSR  
ESD  
ETM  
end of frame  
programmable array logic, see also PLD  
program counter  
execution program status register  
electrostatic discharge  
embedded trace macrocell  
PC  
PCB  
PGA  
printed circuit board  
programmable gain amplifier  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 137 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
Acronym Description  
PHUB  
Table 14-1. Acronyms Used in this Document (continued)  
Acronym  
SOF  
Description  
peripheral hub  
physical layer  
start of frame  
PHY  
PICU  
PLA  
SPI  
Serial Peripheral Interface, a communications  
protocol  
port interrupt control unit  
programmable logic array  
programmable logic device, see also PAL  
phase-locked loop  
SR  
slew rate  
SRAM  
SRES  
SWD  
SWV  
TD  
static random access memory  
software reset  
PLD  
PLL  
serial wire debug, a test protocol  
single-wire viewer  
PMDD  
POR  
PRES  
PRS  
PS  
package material declaration data sheet  
power-on reset  
transaction descriptor, see also DMA  
total harmonic distortion  
transimpedance amplifier  
technical reference manual  
transistor-transistor logic  
transmit  
precise low-voltage reset  
pseudo random sequence  
port read data register  
THD  
TIA  
TRM  
TTL  
®
PSoC  
PSRR  
PWM  
RAM  
RISC  
RMS  
RTC  
RTL  
Programmable System-on-Chip™  
power supply rejection ratio  
pulse-width modulator  
TX  
UART  
Universal Asynchronous Transmitter Receiver, a  
communications protocol  
random-access memory  
reduced-instruction-set computing  
root-mean-square  
UDB  
universal digital block  
Universal Serial Bus  
USB  
real-time clock  
USBIO  
USB input/output, PSoC pins used to connect to  
a USB port  
register transfer language  
remote transmission request  
receive  
RTR  
RX  
VDAC  
WDT  
voltage DAC, see also DAC, IDAC  
watchdog timer  
SAR  
SC/CT  
SCL  
successive approximation register  
switched capacitor/continuous time  
WOL  
write once latch, see also NVL  
watchdog timer reset  
external reset I/O pin  
crystal  
WRES  
XRES  
XTAL  
2
I C serial clock  
2
SDA  
S/H  
I C serial data  
sample and hold  
15. Reference Documents  
SINAD  
SIO  
signal to noise and distortion ratio  
PSoC® 3, PSoC® 5 Architecture TRM  
PSoC® 3 Registers TRM  
special input/output, GPIO with advanced  
features. See GPIO.  
SOC  
start of conversion  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 138 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
16. Document Conventions  
16.1 Units of Measure  
Table 16-1. Units of Measure  
Symbol  
°C  
Unit of Measure  
degrees Celsius  
decibels  
dB  
fF  
femtofarads  
hertz  
Hz  
KB  
kbps  
Khr  
kHz  
k  
1024 bytes  
kilobits per second  
kilohours  
kilohertz  
kilohms  
ksps  
LSB  
Mbps  
MHz  
M  
Msps  
µA  
kilosamples per second  
least significant bit  
megabits per second  
megahertz  
megaohms  
megasamples per second  
microamperes  
microfarads  
microhenrys  
microseconds  
microvolts  
µF  
µH  
µs  
µV  
µW  
mA  
ms  
mV  
nA  
microwatts  
milliamperes  
milliseconds  
millivolts  
nanoamperes  
nanoseconds  
nanovolts  
ns  
nV  
ohms  
pF  
picofarads  
ppm  
ps  
parts per million  
picoseconds  
seconds  
s
sps  
sqrtHz  
V
samples per second  
square root of hertz  
volts  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 139 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
17. Revision History  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Automotive Family Datasheet, Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-57330  
Submission  
Date  
Orig. of  
Change  
Revision  
ECN  
Description of Change  
**  
2800070  
2921624  
01/05/10  
SECA  
MKEA  
New data sheet  
*A  
04/26/2010  
Updated Active Mode Idd values in Table 11-2  
Updated Boost AC and DC specifications  
Updated solder paste reflow temperature (Table 11-3)  
Moved Filo spec from ILO DC to ILO AC table  
Updated Figure 7-14, Interrupt and DMA processing  
Added Bytes column in Tables 4-1 and 4-5  
Updated Figure 6-3, Power mode transitions  
Updated JTAG and SWD specifications  
Updated Interrupt Vector table  
Updated Sales links  
Updated PCB Schematic  
Updated Vbias spec  
Added UDBs subsection under 11.6 Digital Peripherals  
Updated Iout parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table  
Added footnote in PLL AC Specification table  
Added Load regulation and Line regulation parameters to Inductive Boost  
Regulator DC Specifications table  
Updated Icc parameter in LCD Direct Drive DC Specs table  
Updated Tstartup parameter in AC Specifications table  
Updated LVD in Tables 6-2 and 6-3  
In page 1, updated internal oscillator range under Precision programmable  
clocking to start from 3 MHz  
Updated Pin Descriptions section and modified Figures 6-6, 6-8, 6-9  
Added PLL intermediate frequency row with footnote in PLL AC Specs table  
Added bullets on CapSense in page 1; added CapSense column in Section  
Updated Figure 2-6 (PCB Layout)  
Updated Tstartup values in Table 11-3  
Updated IMO frequency  
Updated section 5.2 and Table 11-2 to correct suggestion of execution from  
Flash  
Updated Vref specs in Table 11-21.  
Updated IDAC uncompensated gain error in Table 11-25.  
Updated Tresp, high and low power modes, in Table 11-24.  
Updated Delay from Interrupt signal input to ISR code execution from ISR code  
in Table 72.  
Updated sleep wakeup time in Table 6-3 and Tsleep in Table 11-3.  
Updated SNR condition in Table 11-20  
*B  
*C  
3490494  
3994809  
01/11/2012  
05/08/2013  
GIR  
Updated Figure 6-7 on page 34  
KPAT  
Updated all tables in Electrical Specifications.  
Updated Ordering Information (Updated part numbers, JTAG ID).  
Removed all references of Vboost across the document.  
*D  
4047900  
07/02/2013  
RASB  
Changed status from Preliminary to Final.  
Updated Features.  
Updated Architectural Overview.  
Updated Memory.  
Updated Analog Subsystem.  
Updated Electrical Specifications.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 140 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
17. Revision History (continued)  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Automotive Family Datasheet, Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-57330  
Submission  
Date  
Orig. of  
Change  
Revision  
ECN  
Description of Change  
*E  
4109902  
08/31/2013  
NFB /  
ANMD  
Updated Features.  
Updated Architectural Overview:  
Added Note 4 and referred the same note in features in “The heart of the analog  
subsystem is a fast, accurate, configurable delta-sigma ADC with these  
features”.  
Updated Pinouts:  
Updated Figure 2-5.  
Updated Memory:  
Updated EEPROM:  
Updated description.  
Updated Nonvolatile Latches (NVLs):  
Updated Table 5-2 and Table 5-3.  
Updated Memory Map:  
Updated I/O Port SFRs:  
Updated xdata Space:  
Updated Table 5-5.  
Updated Digital Subsystem:  
Updated Universal Digital Block:  
Updated PLD Module:  
Updated Figure 7-3.  
2
Updated I C:  
Updated description.  
Updated Analog Subsystem:  
Updated Programmable SC/CT Blocks:  
Updated PGA:  
Updated Table 8-3.  
Updated Electrical Specifications:  
Updated Device Level Specifications:  
Updated Table 11-2.  
Updated Inputs and Outputs:  
Updated GPIO:  
Removed figure “GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Fast Strong Mode,  
V
= 3.3 V, 25 pF Load” and figure “GPIO Output Rise and Fall Times, Slow  
DDIO  
Strong Mode, V  
= 3.3 V, 25 pF Load”.  
DDIO  
Updated Analog Peripherals:  
Updated Delta-Sigma ADC:  
Updated Table 11-17.  
Updated Table 11-18.  
Updated Voltage Reference:  
Updated Table 11-20.  
Updated Programmable Gain Amplifier:  
Updated Table 11-33.  
Updated Memory:  
Updated Flash:  
Updated Table 11-52.  
Updated Packaging:  
spec 51-85048 – Changed revision from *G to *H.  
Updated in new template.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 141 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
17. Revision History (continued)  
Description Title: PSoC® 3: CY8C36 Automotive Family Datasheet, Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)  
Document Number: 001-57330  
Submission  
Date  
Orig. of  
Change  
Revision  
ECN  
Description of Change  
*F  
4174914  
10/26/2013  
NFB /  
ANMD  
Updated Pinouts:  
Added Note 7 and referred the same note in 100 mA in description.  
Updated Electrical Specifications:  
Updated Absolute Maximum Ratings:  
Updated Table 11-1.  
Added Note 17 and referred the same note in Table 11-1.  
Added Note 19 and referred the same note in Ivddio parameter in Table 11-1.  
Updated Analog Peripherals:  
Updated Opamp:  
Updated Table 11-15.  
Updated Voltage Reference:  
Updated Table 11-20.  
Updated Packaging:  
Updated Table 13-1.  
*G  
4281204  
02/14/2014  
ANMD  
Updated Digital Subsystem:  
Updated I C:  
2
Updated Note 16.  
Updated Electrical Specifications:  
Updated Analog Peripherals:  
Updated Delta-Sigma ADC:  
Updated Table 11-17:  
Updated Conditions of Vos parameter.  
Updated Memory:  
Updated Flash:  
Updated Table 11-52:  
Added Note 54 and referred the same note in “Flash data retention time,  
retention period measured from last erase cycle” in description column.  
Replaced “Tjavg” with “T ” in last row in conditions column.  
A
Updated Packaging:  
spec 51-85048 – Changed revision from *H to *I.  
Completing Sunset Review.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Page 142 of 143  
PSoC® 3: CY8C36  
Automotive Family Datasheet  
18. Sales, Solutions, and Legal Information  
Worldwide Sales and Design Support  
Cypress maintains a worldwide network of offices, solution centers, manufacturer’s representatives, and distributors. To find the office  
closest to you, visit us at Cypress Locations.  
®
Products  
PSoC Solutions  
Automotive  
cypress.com/go/automotive  
cypress.com/go/clocks  
cypress.com/go/interface  
cypress.com/go/powerpsoc  
cypress.com/go/plc  
psoc.cypress.com/solutions  
PSoC 1 | PSoC 3 | PSoC 4 | PSoC 5LP  
Clocks & Buffers  
Interface  
Cypress Developer Community  
Lighting & Power Control  
Community | Forums | Blogs | Video | Training  
Technical Support  
Memory  
cypress.com/go/memory  
cypress.com/go/psoc  
cypress.com/go/support  
PSoC  
Touch Sensing  
USB Controllers  
Wireless/RF  
cypress.com/go/touch  
cypress.com/go/USB  
cypress.com/go/wireless  
© Cypress Semiconductor Corporation, 2010-2014. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Cypress Semiconductor Corporation assumes no responsibility for the use of  
any circuitry other than circuitry embodied in a Cypress product. Nor does it convey or imply any license under patent or other rights. Cypress products are not warranted nor intended to be used for  
medical, life support, life saving, critical control or safety applications, unless pursuant to an express written agreement with Cypress. Furthermore, Cypress does not authorize its products for use as  
critical components in life-support systems where a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress products in life-support systems  
application implies that the manufacturer assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.  
Any Source Code (software and/or firmware) is owned by Cypress Semiconductor Corporation (Cypress) and is protected by and subject to worldwide patent protection (United States and foreign),  
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions. Cypress hereby grants to licensee a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to copy, use, modify, create derivative works of,  
and compile the Cypress Source Code and derivative works for the sole purpose of creating custom software and or firmware in support of licensee product to be used only in conjunction with a Cypress  
integrated circuit as specified in the applicable agreement. Any reproduction, modification, translation, compilation, or representation of this Source Code except as specified above is prohibited without  
the express written permission of Cypress.  
Disclaimer: CYPRESS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Cypress reserves the right to make changes without further notice to the materials described herein. Cypress does not  
assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein. Cypress does not authorize its products for use as critical components in life-support systems where  
a malfunction or failure may reasonably be expected to result in significant injury to the user. The inclusion of Cypress’ product in a life-support systems application implies that the manufacturer  
assumes all risk of such use and in doing so indemnifies Cypress against all charges.  
Use may be limited by and subject to the applicable Cypress software license agreement.  
Document Number: 001-57330 Rev. *G  
Revised February 14, 2014  
Page 143 of 143  
CapSense®, PSoC® 3, PSoC® 5, and PSoC® Creator™ are trademarks and PSoC® is a registered trademark of Cypress Semiconductor Corp. ARM is a registered trademark, and Keil, and RealView  
are trademarks, of ARM Limited. All other trademarks or registered trademarks referenced herein are property of the respective corporations.  

相关型号:

CY8C3666PVA-180

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PDSO48, 0.300 INCH, ROHS COMPLIANT, SSOP-48
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-022

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-026

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-041

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3666PVI-057

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C36_10

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC?)
CYPRESS

CY8C36_11

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC?)
CYPRESS

CY8C36_1105

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC) Multiply and divide instructions
CYPRESS

CY8C36_12

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
CYPRESS

CY8C36_13

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC®)
CYPRESS

CY8C38

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS

CY8C3865AXI-015

Programmable System-on-Chip (PSoC)
CYPRESS